STANDARD

SPECIFICATIONS
F
O
R
ROAD AND BRIDGE
WORKS
 Table of Contents

SECTION 100: GENERAL PAGE NO.

101 INTRODUCTION 1-1

102 DEFINITION 1-1
103 SCOPE OF WORK 1-1
104 ACCOMMODATION OF TRAFFIC 1-2
105 PUBLICLY AND PRIVATELY OWNED SERVICES 1-5
106 SURVEY AND SETTING OUT 1-6
107 ACCESS TO ABUTTING PROPERTIES 1-8
108 DIVERSION BRIDGES 1-8
109 MAINTENANCE OF ROAD 1-8
110 SITE INFORMATION 1-9
111 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION WORKS 1-10
112 NOTES ABOUT MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1-13
113 EQUIVALENCY OF STANDARDS 1-15
114 UNITS OF MEASUREMENT, ABBREVIATION AND TERMINOLOGY 1-16
115 PROGRAM 1-17
116 SUPPLY OF PROJECT RECORD 1-18

SECTION 200: SITE CLEARANCE

201 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 2-1

202 DISMANTLING CULVERTS, BRIDGES, OTHER STRUCTURES AND
PAVEMENT 2-4
SECTION 800: TRANSPORTATION OF MATERIAL
PAGE NO
801 GENERAL 8-1
802 DEFINITIONS 8-1
803 LOCATING MATERIAL SOURCES 8-2
804 SAFETY AND PUBLIC HEALTH REQUIREMENTS 8-3
805 ACCESS ROADS AND TRAFFIC CONTROL 8-3
806 SITE CLEARANCE AND REMOVAL OF TOPSOIL AND OVERBURDEN 8-3

ii Page
 PAGE NO
807 SELECTION OF MATERIALS 8-4
808 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 8-4

SECTION 900: EARTHWORKS

901 SCOPE 9-1
902 DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 9-1
903 CLASSIFICATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS 9-3
904 EXPLOSIVES AND BLASTING 9-4
905 EXCAVATION IN CUTTING 9-7
906 EXCAVATION BELOW EMBANKMENTS AND BELOW FORMATION
LEVEL 9-7
907 EXCAVATION FOR FOUNDATION 9-8
908 REFILLING OF FOUNDATION PITS AND TRENCHES, REMOVAL OF
AND FILLING TO STRUCTURES 9-11
909 FORMING OF EMBANKMENT AND OTHERS AREAS OF FILL 9-12

910 COMPACTION OF EMBANKMENT AND OTHER AREAS OF

FILL/BACKFILL 9-14
911 COMPACTION TRIALS 9-14
912 BENCHING 9-15
913 EARTHWORKS TO BE KEPT FREE OF WATER 9-16
914 WATERCOURSES 9-16
915 FILLING EXISTING WATERCOURSES 9-16
916 PROCESS CONTROL 9-16
917 MEASUREMENT 9-16
918 PAYMENT 9-17

iii Page
 SECTION 1000 – SUBGRADES
PAGE NO.
1001. SCOPE 10-1
1002. DEFINITIONS 10-1
1003. PREPARATION AND SURFACE TREATMENT OF FORMATION 10-1
1004. CAPPING LAYER 10-3
1005. MECHANICAL STABILISATION 10-4
1006. LIME STABILISATION 10-7
1007. MEASUREMENT 10-13
1008. PAYMENT 10-13

SECTION 1200: SUBBASE, BASE, HARD SHOULDER AND GRAVEL

WEARING COURSE
PAGE NO.
1201 GRANULAR SUBBASE 12-1
1202 CEMENT TREATED SOIL SUB-BASE/BASE 12-4
1203 WATER BOUND MACADAM BASE AND SUB-BASE 12-8
1204 CRUSHER-RUN MACADAM FOR BASE AND SUBBASE 12-13
1205 SHOULDER ISLANDS AND MEDIAN 12-15
1206 TELFORD BASE (BLOCK PITCHING) 12-17
1207 DRY BOUND MACADAM BASE AND SUB-BASE 12-18
1208 WET MIX MACADAM BASE AND SUBBASE 12-21

SECTION 1800: FLASEWORK, FORMWORK AND SURFACE FINISH FOR

CONCRETE STRUCTURES
1801 SCOPE AND DEFINITIONS 18-1
1802 GENERAL 18-1
1803 FALSEWORK 18-1
1804 FORMWORK FOR CONCRETE 18-5
1805 SURFACE FINISH ON FORMED SURFACES 18-8
1806 FINISHES ON UNFORMED SURFACES 18-9
1807 REMEDIAL WORK TO DEFECTIVE SURFACES 18-11
1808 MEASUREMENT 18-11
1809 PAYMENT 18-11

iv Page
 SECTION 2000 – CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES
PAGE NO.
2001 SCOPE 20-1
2002 DEFINITIONS 20-1
2003 MATERIAL FOR CONCRETE 20-1
2004 DESIGN OF CONCRETE MIXES 20-6
2005 MIXING CONCRETE 20-12
2006 TRANSPORTATION OF CONCRETE 20-13
2007 PLACING OF CONCRETE 20-14
2008 COMPACTION OF CONCRETE 20-16
2009 CURING OF CONCRETE 20-17
2010 PROTECTION OF FRESH CONCRETE 20-18
2011 CONCRETING IN HOT WEATHER 20-18
2012 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS 20-19
2013 RECORDS OF CONCRETE PLACING 20-20
2014 REINFORCEMENT 20-20
2015 CONCRETE FOR SECONDARY PURPOSES 20-22
2016 EARLY LOADING 20-23
2017 TEST AND STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE 20-23
2018 MEASUREMENT 20-26
2019 PAYMENT 20-27

SECTION 2400 – RIVER TRAINING AND PROTECTION WORKS

PAGE NO
2401 MANUAL WOVEN GABIONS 24 - 1
2402 MECHANICALLY WOVEN CRATES (GABIONS AND MATTRESS) 24 - 5
2403 GEOSYNTHETICS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS 24 - 14
2404 GEOTEXTILES FOR FILTRATION, DRAINAGE, AND SEPARATION 24 - 18
2405 GEOGRID 24 - 21
2406 GEO - COMPOSITE DRAINS 24 - 22
2407 GEOCELL FOR SLOPE PROTECTION 24 -25
2408 GEOSYNTHETIC MAT 24 – 26

v Page
 PAGE NO
2409 NATURAL GEOTEXTILE 24 – 28
2410 PAVING FABRICS/GLASS GRIDS 24 - 29
2411 SOIL NAILING SYSTEM (WITH SEMI-FLEXIBLE 3D GALVANIZED
STEEL MAT) FOR SLOPE PROTECTION 24 - 33
2412 CRIB WALLS 24 - 44
2413 SLOPE STABILISATION AND SURFACE EROSION PROTECTION 24 - 46
2414 SUB-SURFACE DRAINS 24 - 52
2415 DRILLED SUB-SURFACE DRAINS 24 - 56
2416 . SCOUR PROTECTION AND RIVER TRAINING WORKS 24 – 56

SECTION 2600: MASONRY FOR STRUCTURES

2601 SCOPE 26-1

2602 MATERIALS 26-1
2603 CONSTRUCTION 26-1
2604 ASHLAR 26-3
2605 BLOCK-IN-COURSE 26-3
2606 SQUARE RUBBLE-COURSED OR BROKEN COURSE 26-3
2607 RANDOM RUBBLE-COURSED OR UNCOURSED 26-3
2608 DRY RANDOM RUBBLE 26-4
2609 COMPOSITE RANDOM RUBBLE 26-4
2610 TEST AND STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE 26-4
2611 MEASUREMENT 26-4
2612 PAYMENT 26-42

SECTION 2800: BIO ENGINEERING WORKS

2801 SCOPE 28-1
2802 PROVISION OF SEEDS 28-1
2803 PROVISION OF PLANT CUTTINGS 28-3
2804 NURSERY CONSTRUCTION 28-8
2805 NURSERY OPERATION AND MANAGEMENT 28-11
2806 FINAL SLOPE PREPARATION FOR BI0-ENGINEERING 28-15
2807 SITE PLANTING AND SOWING 28-17
2808 JUTE NETTING WORKS 28-29

vi Page
 PAGE NO
2809 GABION WIRE BOLSTERS, SUB-SOIL DRAINS AND WIRE NETTING 28-32
2810 SITE PROTECTION 28-35
2811 SITE AFTERCARE AND MAINTENANCE 28-38
2812 TURFING WITH SODS 28-39

vii Page
 SECTION 100: GENERAL
PAGE NO.
101 INTRODUCTION 1-1

102 DEFINITION 1-1

103 SCOPE OF WORK 1-1

104 ACCOMMODATION OF TRAFFIC 1-2

105 PUBLICLY AND PRIVATELY OWNED SERVICES 1-5

106 SURVEY AND SETTING OUT 1-6

107 ACCESS TO ABUTTING PROPERTIES 1-8

108 DIVERSION BRIDGES 1-8

109 MAINTENANCE OF ROAD 1-8

110 SITE INFORMATION 1-9

111 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION WORKS 1-10

112 NOTES ABOUT MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1-13

113 PROGRAM 1-17

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

SECTION 100 - GENERAL

101 INTRODUCTION
These Specifications shall apply to all such road and bridge works as are required to be
executed as per Contract or as per instruction of the Engineer. All Work performed shall be
in conformity with the lines, grades, slopes, cross-sections super elevation data, and
dimensions as shown in the Drawings. If the Drawing, Special Provisions, or these
Specifications, state specific tolerances, then the Work shall be performed within those
limits.
The quality of materials, processing of materials as may be needed at the site, salient features
of the construction work and quality of finished work shall comply with the requirements
set forth in succeeding sections. Where the drawings and Specifications describe a portion
of the work in only general terms, and not in complete detail, it shall be understood that only
the sound practice is to prevail, materials and workmanship of the best quality are to be
employed and the instructions of the Engineer are to be fully complied.
102 DEFINITION
The words such as Contract, Contractor, Engineer / Engineer In charge, Drawings
Employer, Government, Works and site used in this specification shall be considered to
have the meaning as specified in definitions of these terms given in the General conditions
of Contract.
103 SCOPE OF WORK
(1) The work to be carried out under the Contract shall be generally described in the Bid
Documents as well as in the Bill of Quantities furnished in the Bid Documents.
(2) The works to be performed shall also include all general works preparatory to the
construction of roads, bridges, canal crossings, drainage and all due and satisfactory
construction, completion and maintenance of works to the intent and meaning of the
drawings and these specifications and further drawings and other instruction that may
be issued by the Engineer from time to time.
The scope of work shall include compliance by the Contractor with all conditions of
Contract whether specifically mentioned or not in the various Clauses of these
Specifications, all materials, apparatus, plant, equipment, tools, fuel, water, strutting,
timbering, transport, offices stores, workshop, staff, labour and the provision of proper
and sufficient protective works, diversions, temporary fencing and lighting. It shall
also include: safety of workers at construction site, first-aid equipment, suitable
accommodation for the staff and workmen with adequate sanitary arrangements, the
effecting and maintenance of all insurances, the payment of all wages, salaries, fees,
royalties, duties or other charges arising out of the erection of works and the regular
clearance of rubbish, reinstatement and clearing-up of the site as may be required on
completion of work, safety of the public and protection of the works and adjoining
land.

SECTION 100 GENERAL Page 1-1

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

(3) The Contractor shall ensure that all actions are taken to build in quality assurance (QA)
in the planning, management and execution of works The quality assurance shall cover
all stages of work such as setting out, selection of materials, selection of construction
methods, selection of equipment and plant, deployment of personnel and supervisory
staff, quality control testing, etc. The QA program shall cover not limited to
followings:
 Organization and management responsibility
 Document and data control
 Construction program
 Method statement
 Process control
 Working Inspection, Testing and documentary procedures
 Arrangement for smooth safe traffic flow during construction and maintenance
 Control and documentation of purchasing and handling of materials
 Maintenance of records for non- conformity and timely corrective actions
 Internal quality audit
 Training to staff
 Environment Management Action Plan (EMAP)
The QA plan shall be submitted to the engineer for approval not later than 28 days
from the date of signing of contract agreement. Work of building in quality assurance
shall be deemed to be covered in the scope of the work.

113 PROGRAM
The Contractor shall provide all information needed for fulfilment of the program and
required in accordance with the Conditions of Contract including the sequence in which he
intends to work including implementation of quality assurance plan.

SECTION 100 GENERAL Page 1-2

 SECTION 200: SITE CLEARANCE
PAGE NO

201 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 2-1

202 DISMANTLING CULVERTS, BRIDGES, OTHER STRUCTURES AND

PAVEMENT 2-4
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Section 200: Site Clearance

201 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
(1) Scope

The Section covers the clearing and grubbing necessary for the construction of the
works covered by the contract.
(2) Description of Work
(a) Clearing
Clearing shall consist of the cutting, removing and disposal of all tree, bushes, shrubs,
grass, weeds, other vegetation, anthills, rubbish, fences, top organic soil not
exceeding 150 mm in thickness and all other objectionable material, resulting from
the clearing and grubbing. It shall also include the removal and disposal of structures
that obtrude, encroach upon or otherwise obstruct the work.
The moving of a certain amount of soil or gravel material may be inherent to or
unavoidable during the process of clearing and no extra payment shall be made for
this. Clearing shall include the removal of all rocks and boulders of up to 0.15 m 3 in
size exposed or lying on the surface.

(3) Execution of Work

(a) Areas to be cleared
Stumps, embedded logs, roots and all other vegetation growth and accumulated
rubbish of whatsoever nature and all other objectionable material shall be completely
removed to a depth as specified in Sub-clause 201 (2) (a) and (b).
Normally the portions of the road reserve that fall within the limits of the road prism,
as well as certain borrow areas shall be cleared and/or grubbed. Where the road
reserve is to remain unfenced, the full width of the road reserve shall be cleared
and/or grubbed except for such trees designated by the Engineer to be left standing
and uninjured.
The Contractor shall mark the boundaries of the area for clearing and grubbing and
seek the approval of the Engineer before commencement of the work. The Engineer
shall designate in detail the exact areas to be cleared and the time at which it shall be
done.
(b) Disposal of Material
Material obtained from clearing shall be disposed off in borrow pits or other suitable
places as directed by the Engineer. The burning of combustible material shall not,
normally, be permitted and may only be done with the prior written approval of the
Engineer.

(c) Clearing of Landslides

“When instructed by the Engineer, the contractor shall remove all debris from
landslides as soon as possible after receiving instruction. The first priority will be the
removal of material to maintain safe vehicular access and the second to remove
material in order to continue construction of the works. The Engineer shall determine
the amount of the material to be removed and/or any further work which may be
required to stabilise the landslide.

SECTION 200 SITE CLEARANCE Page 2-4

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Where a landslide has occurred in an area where the contractor has commenced but
not completed excavation works of any nature and such excavation works have, in
the opinion of the Engineer, been the direct or indirect cause of the landslide, the
responsibility for clearing and stabilising the landslide shall rest entirely with the
contractor. Elsewhere the volume of material instructed to be removed shall be
measured in cubic feet.

(d) Clearing of Debris

The contractor shall remove all debris from culverts and side drains as per the
instruction of the Engineer.
(4) Measurement

Clearing executed as per this Specification shall be measured in cu. feet.

(5) Payment

The completed , measured and accepted works will be paid as indicated in BoQ in
lump sum.

SECTION 200 SITE CLEARANCE Page 2-5

 SECTION 800: TRANSPORTATION OF MATERIAL PAGE NO
801 GENERAL 8-1

802 DEFINITIONS 8-1

803 LOCATING MATERIAL SOURCES 8-2

804 SAFETY AND PUBLIC HEALTH REQUIREMENTS 8-3

805 ACCESS ROADS AND TRAFFIC CONTROL 8-3

806 SITE CLEARANCE AND REMOVAL OF TOPSOIL AND OVERBURDEN 8-3

807 SELECTION OF MATERIALS 8-4

808 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 8-4

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

SECTION 800: TRANSPORTATION OF MATERIAL

801 GENERAL
Unless otherwise stated in the contact, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to select the
sources of aggregates for concrete, stone for base, sub base, bituminous mix base binder
course and wearing course, chipping for surface, rock fill for swamps etc. and the sources
of natural/suitable materials, such as fill material, for the construction of embankments,
gravel for sub base, base, surfacing and shoulder. Such sources shall be designated as rock
quarries, quarries, alluvial deposits and borrow and are defined in Clause 802. Certain rock
quarries, quarries, alluvial deposits, borrow pits may have or have been identified prior to
the commencement of the contract and the Engineer shall instruct the Contractor as to which
of these shall be utilized for the extraction as natural or suitable materials to be used in the
works.
Provisions are included in subsequent Clause of this Specification for additional rock
quarries, quarries, alluvial deposits borrow pits to be identified and located by the Contractor
during the contract. Stockpile and spoil shall be located by the Contractor subject to the
approval the Engineer.
802 DEFINITIONS
(1) Rock Quarry
A rock quarry is an open surface working in massive rock form which stone is removed
by drilling and blasting for use in the works.
(2) Quarry
A quarry is an open surface working form which stone or aggregate for sub base, base
and surfacing is extracted for use in the works.
(3) Alluvial Deposit
An alluvial deposit is a site where gravel and aggregate of alluvial origin are extracted
for use in the works.
(4) Borrow Pit
A borrow pit is a site from which loose material, other than stone, is removed for use
in the works.
(5) Stockpile Area
A stockpile area is an area where material such as topsoil, fill material, gravel or
aggregate is stockpiled prior to use in the works.
(6) Spoil Area
A spoil area is a site upon which surplus or unsuitable materials arising out of works
are dumped within or beyond the road reserve as indicated on the Drawing or directed
by the Engineer.

SECTION 800 TRANSPORTATION OF MATERIAL Page 8-1

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

803 LOCATING MATERIAL SOURCES

(1) The Contractor shall be responsible for locating all material sources and for the
acquisition or renting of all land required for rock quarries, quarries, alluvial deposit,
borrow pits, spoil and stockpile areas and for access thereto in accordance with the
Conditions of Contract.
The location and size of rock quarries, quarries, alluvial deposit borrow pits, spoil and
stockpile areas proposed by the Contractor shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
(2) The Contractor shall submit for the Engineer’s approval full information regarding the
proposed location of the material source not later than 30 days after issue the order to
commence the works of all rock quarries, quarries, and alluvial deposits, borrow pits,
spoil and stockpile areas that the Contractor will require for the whole the works.
The Contractor’s proposal shall include but not limited to the following;
(a) A site plan in a suitable scale of proposed location of material source
(b) Laboratory test results of material as per requirement mention in the related
Section of the specification
(c) Other relevant information
(3) Where the Contractor uses a rock quarry, quarry, alluvial deposit, or a borrow pit
identified or instructed by the Engineer he shall obtain the Engineer’s approval of the
areas required for the rock quarry, quarry, alluvial deposit, or borrow pit and of the
sitting of the access roads into the rock quarry, quarry, alluvial deposit, or borrow pit.
The Engineer may require the Contractor to modify his requirements for any of the
reasons outlined in Sub-clause 803 (1) (a), (b), (c), (d) or (f).
Where rock quarries, quarries, alluvial deposits, or borrow pits, available for
inspection at the time of the Tender, are instructed by the Engineer the Contractor shall
satisfy himself as to the quality and quantity of materials available before providing
the information required in this Clause. Should such investigations reveal that there is
insufficient suitable material for the use for which such material sources were
intended, the Contractor shall immediately inform the Engineer in writing and the
Engineer shall either direct that such sources are extended or that new sources shall be
used.
(4) When a rock quarry, quarry, alluvial deposit, borrow pit spoil or stockpile area has
insufficient suitable material or area for the use for which it was intended the
Contractor shall propose in writing that either any existing rock quarry, quarry, alluvial
deposit, borrow pit, spoil or stockpile area be extended or that a new rock quarry,
quarry, alluvial deposit, borrow pit spoil or stockpile area shall be used. The approval
and acquisition of such new or extended rock quarries, quarries, alluvial deposits,
borrow pits, spoil or stockpile areas shall in accordance with all the above provisions
of this Clause for the acquisition of the original rock quarries, quarries, alluvial
deposits, borrow pits, spoil or stockpile areas.

SECTION 800 TRANSPORTATION OF MATERIAL Page 8-2

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

804 SAFETY AND PUBLIC HEALTH REQUIREMENTS

The Contractor shall comply with the prevalent laws and Regulations including those of the
Local Authority regarding public health and safety in respect of the operation of rock
quarries, quarries, alluvial deposit, borrow pits, spoil or stockpile areas, and in the absence
of, or in addition to such Regulations, shall comply with the following conditions:
(1) All areas of work, if they are not naturally under water, shall be drained and kept
drained where a quarry or borrow pit has been excavated such that it will not drain
naturally, it shall be kept pumped dry while being used.
(2) The Contractor shall confine his operations solely to the areas provided and shall
demarcate the boundary of the area and erect temporary or permanent fencing as
instructed by the Engineer.
(3) Where the height of any face exceeds 1 meter, the Contractor shall provide, erect and
maintain at his own expense stock proof fencing and gates to prevent unauthorized
access to the top of the working face.
(4) On completion of the work all faces shall be neatly trimmed to a slope flatter than 1:4.
Where this is impracticable or where the working face is to be left exposed, the edge
shall be permanently fenced, as instructed by the Engineer and measurement and
payment for such fencing shall be in accordance with Section 400.
(5) On completion of work temporary fences and all temporary structures shall be
demolished and removed. All latrine pits shall be filled in and drained. The site shall
be top soiled and left neat and tidy.
805 ACCESS ROADS AND TRAFFIC CONTROL
The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of Clause 103 and with the Conditions
of Contract with regard to the construction and maintenance of access roads to rock quarries,
quarries, alluvial deposits, borrow pits spoil and stockpile areas and with regard to traffic
operations thereon.
806 SITE CLEARANCE AND REMOVAL OF TOPSOIL AND OVERBURDEN
Unless otherwise specified in the contract or instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor
shall clear the sites of all rock quarries, quarries, alluvial deposits, borrow pits, spoil and
stockpile areas in accordance with Section 200 but measurement and payment shall be made
in accordance with this Section. All existing fences, tree, hedges and other features which
the Engineer shall instruct shall not be removed or otherwise dealt. They shall be protected
in accordance with Section 200.
Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove topsoil and/or
overburden from rock quarries, quarries, and alluvial deposits, borrow pits and spoil and
stockpile areas. The Engineer shall direct whether topsoil shall be stripped and stockpiled
separately or shall be excavated and spoiled together with the overburden. If suitable, the
Engineer may direct for the use of overburden in the works.

SECTION 800 TRANSPORTATION OF MATERIAL Page 8-3

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

On completion of the work in any rock quarry, quarry, alluvial deposit, borrow pit, spoil or
stockpile area the overburden and/or topsoil which has not been used in the works shall be
pushed back, spread and landscaped over the area of the rock quarry, quarry, alluvial
deposit, borrow pit, spoil or stockpile area. Where topsoil has been stockpiled separately, it
shall be pushed back and spared over the rock quarry, quarry, alluvial deposit, borrow pit,
spoil or stockpile area after landscaping unless the Engineer has instructed that it shall be
used for top soiling in accordance with Section 600.
807 SELECTION OF MATERIALS
Before a quarry, alluvial deposit or borrow pit is opened, the Engineer shall instruct the
Contractor as to the type of material to be excavated and the areas and depth to be worked.
The Engineer may require specific operations of equipment according to the characteristics
of the raw material and the characteristics of the final product to be obtained in accordance
with relevant Section of those Specifications.
Materials of quality shall be tested according to their use in conformance with the relevant
Sections of these Specifications. When the requirements of the final products are not met,
the Engineer may require the Contractor to control the quality of the size selection.
808 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Unless stated otherwise, no separate measurement and payment shall be made in respect of
all items in this Section. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed the cost of
complying all requirements of this Section elsewhere in his rates including al site clearance,
overburden and topsoil removal, access roads to rock quarries, quarries, alluvial deposits,
borrow pits, spoil or stockpile areas and reinstatement including landscaping and spreading
topsoil.
Where the Engineer has instructed that overburden or topsoil will be used in the works,
measurement and payment shall be in accordance with the relevant Sections of these
Specifications.

SECTION 800 TRANSPORTATION OF MATERIAL Page 8-4

 SECTION 900: EARTHWORKS

901 SCOPE................................................................................................................................................1

902 DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................1

903 CLASSIFICATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS.....................................................................3

904 EXPLOSIVES AND BLASTING.......................................................................................................4

905 EXCAVATION IN CUTTING...........................................................................................................7

906 EXCAVATION BELOW EMBANKMENTS AND BELOW FORMATION LEVEL.....................7

907 EXCAVATION FOR FOUNDATION...............................................................................................8

908 REFILLING OF FOUNDATION PITS AND TRENCHES, REMOVAL OF SUPPORTS AND

FILLING TO STRUCTURES ......................................................................................................... 11

909 FORMING OF EMBANKMENT AND OTHERS AREAS OF FILL ............................................ 12

910 COMPACTION OF EMBANKMENT AND OTHER AREAS OF FILL/BACKFILL.................. 14

911 COMPACTION TRIALS................................................................................................................. 14

912 BENCHING...................................................................................................................................... 15

913 EARTHWORKS TO BE KEPT FREE OF WATER ...................................................................... 16

914 WATERCOURSES .......................................................................................................................... 16

915 FILLING EXISTING WATERCOURSES ...................................................................................... 16

916 PROCESS CONTROL..................................................................................................................... 16

917 MEASUREMNT............................................................................................................................. .. 16

918 PAYMENT ....................................................................................................................................... 17

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

SECTION 900: EARTHWORKS

901 SCOPE
This Section covers the works related to the roadway excavation, roadway filling,
excavation for foundation, backfilling, excavation for drains, channels, intercepting drains
etc.
902 DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
(1) Earthwork includes two types of operations i.e. (i) earth excavation and disposal of
the excavated materials (ii) earth excavation and use of excavated materials. The use
of excavated material may be in the form of filling embankment, backfilling, filling
other areas as required.
Earth excavation and disposal implies excavation of all types of materials including
part of the structures below ground level within and outside of the limit of the right of
way except for otherwise specified, shaping the exposed surface of excavation as
specified or directed by the Engineer, removal, hauling and disposal of the excavated
material at the locations and in the manner as specified or directed by the Engineer.
Excavation and filling implies excavation of materials and shaping the exposed surface
of excavated as stated, removal hauling and use of the excavated material at the
location and in the manner as specified or directed by the Engineer.
Excavation and disposal shall include:
(i) Excavation and disposal of any type of material included on the Drawing.
(ii) The excavation and disposal of existing surfacing.
(iii) Excavation and disposal of slides, breakages and caving-ins.
(iv) Excavation and disposal for stream channel, trenches and drains etc.
(v) Excavation required in cuts or under embankments below the lowest normal
limit of excavation as indicated on the Drawing or below ground line.
(vi) Excavation and disposal of unsuitable materials.
(vii) Removal or partial removal of existing embankments and disposal of the
materials as shown on the Drawing or as directed by the Engineer.
(viii) Excavation for foundation and disposal of materials.
Excavation and filling shall include:
(i) Filling for embankment
(ii) Filling for guide bunds, coffer dams, etc.
(iii) Backfilling in trenches, foundation pits etc.
(iv) Any type of other filling or backfilling whereby the ground level is raised or
a hole is filled up.
(2) The following definitions of earthworks materials shall apply to this and other Clauses
of these specifications, if otherwise not specified.
(i) “Topsoil” shall mean the top layer of soil that can support vegetation. It shall

SECTION 900 EARTHWORKS Page 9-1

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

include all turf acceptable for turfing.

(ii) “Suitable Material” shall comprise all that is acceptable in the accordance with
the Contract for use in the Works and which is capable of being compacted in
the manner specified in Clause 909 and 910 to form a stable fill having side
slopes as indicated in the Drawing. The material used in fill (except for rock
fill) shall not contain rock fragments with dimensions of more than 75 mm.
(iii) “Unsuitable Material” shall mean other than suitable material and shall
include:
(a) Material from swamp, marshes or bogs;
(b) Peat, logs, stumps, perishable material, organic clays;
(c) Material susceptible to spontaneous combustion;
(d) Material in a frozen condition;
(e) Clay of liquid limit exceeding 70 and/or plasticity index exceeding 45;
Material stated above in (d) if otherwise suitable shall be classified suitable
when unfrozen.
(iv) “Rock Fill” shall consist of hard material of suitable size for deposition and
compaction as given in Clause 909 and also may comprise rock as defined in
Clause 903 and broken stones.
(v) “Well Graded Granular Material” consisting of gravel and/or sand shall
conform to Clause 609.
(3) No excavated suitable material other than surplus to requirements of the contract shall
be removed from the site except on the direction of the Engineer. Should the
Contractor be permitted to remove suitable material from Site to suit his operational
procedure, then he shall make good at this own expense any consequent deficit of
filling arising therefrom.
(4) Material in surplus to the total requirements of works, and all unsuitable material
shall, unless the Engineer permits otherwise, be run to spoil dumps.
(5) Where the excavation reveals a combination of suitable and unsuitable materials the
Contractor shall carry out the excavation in such a manner that the suitable materials
are excavated separately for use in the works without contamination by the unsuitable
materials.
(6) The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for the stockpiling of top-soil and/or
suitable material.
(7) At all times the Contractor shall ensure that earthworks are not damaged by weather
or traffic. In event of such damage, the Engineer may withdraw approval from the
affected works until the Contractor has carried out repairs to restore the works to their
original condition.
The cost of all such repairs and any additional testing shall be borne by the Contractor.
(8) Prior to commencement of any earthwork, the work shall be set out where required as
specified in Clause 104 following the clearing and grubbing as per Section 200 and

SECTION 900 EARTHWORKS Page 9-2

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

survey of the existing ground shall be conducted jointly by the Contractor and the
Engineer. The survey records shall serve as initial measurements for the determination
of the final quantities of earthwork performed under the contract.
(9) Works on embankments and/or cutting in areas required for the construction of bridges
and other structures shall not be carried out until the Engineer agrees that construction
of such structures is sufficiently advanced that there is no interference or damage to
them.
(10) The Contractor shall get approval of the Engineer in respect of method of earthwork,
type of equipment to be used, disposal and other details before commencement of the
earthwork.
903 CLASSIFICATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS
The excavated materials shall be classified under the following categories. The decision of
the Engineer in respect of the classification of excavated materials shall be the final and
binding upon the Contractor.
Classification: All materials involved in excavation shall be classified by the Engineer in
the following manner:
(1) Soil
This shall comprise topsoil, turf, sand, silt, loam, clay, mud, peat, black cotton soil,
soft shale or loose moorum, a mixture of these and similar material which yields to the
ordinary application of pick, spade and/or shovel, rake or other ordinary digging
implement. Removal of gravel or any other nodular material having dimension in any
one direction not exceeding 75 mm occurring in such strata shall be deemed to be
covered under this category.
(2) Ordinary Rock (not requiring blasting)
This shall include:

(i) rock types such as laterites, shales and conglomerates, varieties of limestone and
sandstone etc., which may be quarried or split with crow bars, also including any
rock which in dry state may be hard, requiring blasting but which, when wet,
becomes soft and manageable by means other than blasting; macadam surface
such as water bound and bitumen/tar bound; soling of roads, paths etc. and hard
core; compact moorum or stabilised soil requiring grafting tool or pick or both
and shovel, closely applied; gravel and cobble stone having maximum
dimension in any one direction between 75 and 300 mm; lime concrete, stone
masonry in lime mortar and brick work in lime/cement mortar below ground
level, reinforced cement concrete which may be broken up with crow bars or
picks and stone masonry in cement mortar below ground level; and bounders
which do not require blasting having maximum dimension in any direction of
more than 300mm, found lying loose on the surface or embedded in river bed,
soil, talus, slope wash and terrace material of dissimilar origin.

SECTION 900 EARTHWORKS Page 9-3

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

(3) Hard Rock (requiring blasting)

This shall comprise:
(i) any rock or cement concrete for the excavation of which the use of mechanical
plant and/or blasting is required;
(ii) reinforced cement concrete (reinforcement cut through but not separated from
the concrete) below ground level; and
(iii) boulders requiring blasting.
(4) Hard Rock (blasting prohibited)
Hard rock requiring blasting as described under (c) but where blasting is prohibited
for any reason and excavation has to be carried out by chiselling, wedging or any other
agreed method.
(5) Marshy Soil
This shall include soils like soft clays and peats excavated below the original ground
level of marshes and swamps and soils excavated from other areas requiring
continuous pumping or bailing out of water.
(6) Authority for classification:
The classification of excavation shall be decided by the Engineer and his decision shall
be final and binding on the Contractor. Merely the use of explosives in excavation will
not be considered as a reason for higher classification unless blasting is clearly
necessary in the opinion of the Engineer.
904 EXPLOSIVES AND BLASTING
(1) General
The procurement, transportation, storage, use, account and disposal of balance and
defective explosive materials shall be strictly as per prevalent laws and ordinances
applicable to the work site. Should there be any discrepancy found between procedures
described hereunder and the prevalent laws and ordinance, the later shall supersede.
Blasting shall be carried out in a manner that completes the excavation to the
lines indicated on the Drawing or as directed by the Engineer, with the least
disturbance to adjacent material. It shall be done only with the written permission of
the Engineer.
The Contractor shall adopt such method that is consistent with the safety and job
requirements. Prior to starting any phase of the operation, the Contractor shall provide
information describing pertinent blasting procedures, dimensions and notes.
(2) Material, Tools and Equipment
All the material, tools and equipment used for blasting operations shall be off approved
type. The Engineer may specify the type of explosives to be allowed in special cases.
The fuse to be used in wet locations shall be water-resistant and shall remain
unaffected when immersed in water for 30 minutes. The rate of burning of the fuse
shall be uniform and definitely known to permit such a length being cut as shall permit

SECTION 900 EARTHWORKS Page 9-4

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

sufficient time to the firer to reach to a safe place before explosion takes place.
Detonators shall be capable for giving effective blasting of the explosives. The
blasting powder, explosives, detonators, fuses, etc., shall be fresh and not damaged
due to dampness, moisture or any other cause. They shall be inspected before use. The
damaged articles, if any, shall be discarded totally and removed from the site
immediately.
(3) Personnel
The blasting operation shall remain in the charge of competent and experienced
blaster with legal license and thorough knowledge of handling explosives and blasting
operations.
(4) Blasting Operations
Explosives shall be used in the quantities and manner recommended by the
manufactures. The written permission of the Engineer shall be obtained for each
location or series of locations where the Contractor wishes to use more than 5 kg of
explosives in one series of blast. Such permission shall not any way relieve the
Contractor of his liabilities under the Conditions of Contract.
The blasting shall be carried out during fixed hours of the day preferably during the
mid-day luncheon hour or at the close of the work as ordered in writing by the
Engineer. The hours shall be made known to the people in the vicinity. All the charges
shall be prepared by the blaster only.
The Engineer must be notified at least 24 hours in advance on any blasting operation.
When blasting is to be carried out, the Contractor shall determine the danger zone
likely to be created, and shall ensure that all personnel, vehicles and livestock are
clear of the zone before and during the blast. In settled areas, the Contractor shall take
steps to avoid damage to property from flying rock by using blasting mats or other
suitable blanketing materials.
The Contractor shall notify each public utility organization/company having structures
in proximity to the site to the work of his intention to use explosives. Such notice shall
be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they
may deem necessary to protect their property from injury.
Danger red flags shall be displayed prominently in all directions during the blasting
operations. The flags shall be planted 200 m from the blasting site in all directions.
People, except those who actually light the fuse, shall be prohibited from entering this
area, and all persons including workmen shall be excluded from the flagged area at
least 10 minutes before the firing, a warning siren being sounded for the purpose.
The charge holes shall be drilled to required depths and at suitable places. Blasting
shall be as light as possible consistent with thorough breakage of the material
necessary for economic loading and hauling. Any method of blasting which leads to
overshooting shall be discontinued. Not more than 10 charges shall be prepared and
fired at a time. The man in charge shall blow a siren in a recognized manner for

SECTION 900 EARTHWORKS Page 9-5

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

cautioning the people. The charges shall be lighted by the blasters only. The blaster
shall count the number of explosions. He shall satisfy himself that all the charges have
been exploded before allowing the workmen to go back to the work site.
After blasting operations, the Contractor shall compact the loose residual material
removed below sub-grade and replace the material removed below sub-grade with
suitable material.
When forming final cut faces, pre-split blasting techniques as recommended in the
Specification for Road and Bridge (IRC) shall be carried out to ensure that blasting
damaged to the cut face is minimized. Details of the pre-splitting technique to be used
shall be notified to and approved by the Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of the
blasting operation.
(5) Misfire
In case of misfire, the following procedure shall be observed:
(a) Sufficient time shall be allowed to account for the delayed blast. The blaster shall
inspect all the charges and determine the missed charge.
(b) If it is blasting powder charge, it shall be completely flooded with water. A new
hole shall be drilled at about 450 mm from the old hole and fired. This should
blast the old charge. Should it not blast the old charge, the procedure shall be
repeated till the old charge is blasted.
(c) In case of charges of gelignite, the blaster shall gently remove the tamping and
the primer with the detonator. A fresh detonator and primer shall then be used to
blast the charge. Alternatively, the hole may be cleared of 30 mm of tamping
and the direction then ascertained by placing a stick in the hole. Another hole
may then be drilled 150 mm away and parallel to it. This hole shall then be
charged and fired when the misfired hole should explode at the
(d) same time. The blaster shall at once report to the Contractor’s office and the
Engineer all cases of misfire, the cause of the same and what steps were taken in
connection therewith.
If a misfire had been found to be due to defective detonator or
gelignite/dynamite, the whole quantity in the box from which defective article
was taken must be sent to the authority as directed by the Engineer for inspection
to ascertain whether all or art of the remaining materials in the box are also
defective.
(6) Account
A careful and day to day account of the explosive shall be maintained by the
Contractor in an approved register and manner which shall be open to inspection by
the Engineer at all times. Records must be kept by the Contractor of all drilling and
blasting operations showing holes diameters and depths, drilling pattern, explosive
charge and type per hole, detonator delay times and total charge per blast. These

SECTION 900 EARTHWORKS Page 9-6

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

records must be submitted to the Engineer on completion of charging.

905 EXCAVATION IN CUTTING
(1) Cleaning and grubbing shall be performed as specified in Section 200.
(2) While executing excavations, the Contractor shall take adequate precautions against
soil erosion and water pollution.
(3) All suitable excavated materials shall be used in construction of the roadway to the
extent as required.
(4) Hauling of material from cutting or borrow pits to embankments other areas of fill
shall proceed only when plant or labour is operating at the place of deposition to ensure
that adequate spreading and compaction of material can take place.
(5) Over-excavation shall not be permitted. Any excess depth excavated below the
formation levels as specified shall be made good by the Contractor at his own expense
by backfilling with suitable material of similar characteristics to those of moved
materials with compaction as specified in Clauses 909 and 910.
(6) The slopes of cutting shall be cleared of all rock fragments which move when prized
by a crowbar, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Where the Engineer
considers that the slope, immediately after dressing, shall not be permanently stable,
he shall direct the Contractor as to the stabilization measures required. The Contractor
shall carry out these measures soon after Engineer’s instruction.
When completed, the excavation slopes shall be true to the lines and levels as shown
on the Drawing or directed by the Engineer. When completed, no point on slopes shall
vary from the designated slopes by more than 150 mm measured at right angles to the
slope, except where excavation is in rock, no point shall vary more than 300 mm from
the designated slope.
(7) If slips, slides, over breaks or subsidence occur in cutting, they shall be removed.
Adequate precautions shall be taken to ensure that during construction, the slopes are
not rendered unstable or give rise to recurrent slides after construction.
(8) If water is encountered in excavations due to seepage, springs, or other causes, it shall
be removed by suitable diversions or bailing out and the excavation shall be kept dry.
The drained water shall be discharged into suitable outlets as not to damage to the
works, crops or any other property. If any such damage is caused due to any negligence
of the Contractor, it shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to repair/restore
to the original condition at his own cost or compensate for the damage.
906 EXCAVATION BELOW EMBANKMENTS AND BELOW FORMATION LEVEL
(1) Where any unsuitable material below the natural ground level under proposed
embankments or below formation level in cutting is required to be excavated, it shall
be removed to such depth and over such areas as shown on the Drawing or as directed
by the Engineer. The excavated materials shall be disposed off as indicated on the
Drawing or directed by the Engineer. The resultant excavation shall be backfilled with

SECTION 900 EARTHWORKS Page 9-7

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

suitable material and shall be levelled and compacted to the density as specified for
forming of the embankments.
Nevertheless, if such backfill has to be carried out in standing water, the Contractor
shall use only an approved non-plastic well-graded granular material having maximum
size of not greater than 75 mm. Such materials may be deposited in water without use
of compaction equipment.
(2) Where shown on the Drawing, approved, graded stones having size from 380 mm to
150 mm and containing not more than 10 percent, below 150 mm in size shall be
placed directly on the natural occurring unsuitable material. This type of rock fill
material shall be deposited in accordance with the requirements of Clause 909 and
compacted as per Clause 910.

(3) If after the removal of material as specified in Sub-clause 906 (1), the Contractor
allows the materials so exposed to reach a condition where compaction of back filling
is impracticable, he shall make good at his own expense either by additional
excavation and filling in the manner specified in this Clause, or by waiting until the
condition of the exposed material is fit to receive the approved backfill.
907 EXCAVATION FOR FOUNDATION
(1) Slope
Excavation shall consist of the removal of material for the construction of foundations
for drainage structures, retaining walls, head walls, cut off walls, culvert, bridges and
other similar structures to the lines and dimensions shown on the Drawing or as
instructed by the Engineer in accordance with the requirements of these specifications.
The work shall include construction of the necessary cofferdams and cribs and
subsequent removal of all necessary sheeting, shoring, bracing, diversion of
water/flow, draining and pumping, the removal of all logs, stumps, grubs and other
deleterious matters and obstructions necessary for placing the foundation; trimming
bottoms of excavations; and cleaning up the site and the disposal of all surplus
material.
(2) Excavation
Excavation shall be taken to the length and width of the lowest step of the footing and
the sides shall be left to plumb where the nature of soil allows it. Where the nature of
soil or the depth of the trench does not permit vertical sides, the Contractor at his own
expense shall put up necessary shoring, strutting and planking or cut slopes to a safer
to a safer angle or both with due regard to the safety of personnel and works and to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The depth to which the excavation is to be carried out shall be as shown on the
Drawing or as directed by the Engineer.
Where blasting is to be restored to, the same shall be carried out in accordance with
Clause 904.

SECTION 900 EARTHWORKS Page 9-8

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

(3) Dewatering, Diversion of Flow and Protection

Normally, open foundation shall be laid dry. Where water is encountered in excavation
due to stream flow, seepage, spring, rain or other reasons, the Contractor shall take
adequate measure such as bailing, pumping, constructing diversion channels, drainage
channels, bunds, cofferdams and other necessary works to keep the foundation pit or
trenches dry, when so required and to protect the green concrete/masonry against
damage by erosion, failure of cut slope or sudden rising of water level. The methods
to be adopted in this regard and other details thereof shall be left to the choice of the
Contractor, but subject to approval of the Engineer. Approval of the Engineer shall,
however, not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for the adequacy of the
Engineer shall, however, not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for the
adequacy of dewatering and protection arrangements and for the quality and safety of
the works.
Where cofferdams are required, these shall be carried to adequate depths and heights,
be safely designed and constructed and be made as watertight as is necessary for
facilitating construction to be carried out inside them. The interior dimensions of the
cofferdams shall be such as to give sufficient clearance for the construction and
inspection and to permit installation of pumping equipment, etc., inside the enclosed
area.
Cofferdam sheet-pilling shall be carried down well below the bottom of the pile caps
or footings, but without interference with any bearing piles. Cofferdams shall be
rigidly constructed and efficiently braced to withstand external pressures when water
is pumped out. Sheeting shall be reasonably watertight and all appreciable leaks
encountered during the operations shall be stopped so that construction of pile caps
can be carried out in the dry. The Contractor shall rectify any cofferdam which, for
any reason, has moved, tilted, or changed its shape and/or size.
Pumping form, the interior of any foundation enclosure shall be done in such a manner
as to preclude the possibility of the movement of water through any fresh concrete.
No pumping shall be permitted during the placing of concrete or for a period of at least
24 hours thereafter, unless it is done from a suitable sump and is separated from the
concrete work by a watertight wall or other similar means.
At the discretion of the Contractor, cement grouting or other approved methods may
be used to prevent or reduce seepage and to protect the area of excavation.
The Contractor shall take all precautions in diverting flow and in discharging the
drained water as not to cause damage to the works, crops or any other property. If any
such damage is caused due to any negligence of the Contractor, it shall be the sole
responsibility of the Contractor to repair/restore to the original at his own cost or
compensate for the damage.
(4) Preparation of Foundation Base
The bottom of the foundation pit shall be levelled both longitudinally and transversely
or stepped as directed by the Engineer. Before footing is laid, the surface shall be

SECTION 900 EARTHWORKS Page 9-9

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

slightly watered and rammed, if surface is not wet. In the event of excavation having
been made deeper than that shown on the Drawing or as otherwise ordered by the
Engineer, the extra depth shall be made up with concrete or masonry of the foundation
grade at the cost of the Contractor. Ordinary filling shall not be allowed for the purpose
to bring the foundation to level. When rock or other hard strata is encountered, it shall
be freed of all soft and loose materials, cleaned and cut to firm surface either levelled
or stepped as directed by the Engineer. All seams shall be cleaned out and filled with
cement mortar or grout to the satisfaction of the Engineer. In the case of rock
excavation, annular space around footing shall be filled with concrete of grade M 10
up to top level of rock.
After the excavation is completed, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer to that
effect and no footing, bedding materials or structures shall be placed until the Engineer
has approved the depth and the suitability of foundation material.
If, at any point, in any foundation excavation, material unsuitable for foundations is
encountered, the Contractor shall, if so instructed by the Engineer, shall remove all
such materials and refill with suitable materials thoroughly compacted by tamping or
rolling in layers of not more than 150mm thick each.
(5) Slips and Blows
If there are any slips or blows in the excavation, these shall be removed by the
Contractor at his own cost.

(6) Public Safety

Where required, trenches and foundations pits shall be securely fenced, provided with
proper caution signs and marked with red lights at night to avoid accident as per Sub-
clause 102 (5).
The Contractor shall take adequate protective measures to see that the excavation
operations do not affect or damage adjoining structures.
(7) Removal of Cofferdams
All cofferdams with all temporary sheeting and bracing shall be removed by the
Contractor after the completion of the substructure unit. The removal shall be carried
out in such a manner as not to disturb or damage the finished concrete. However, sheet
pilling below the top of the pile caps may be left in place at the Contractor’s option
and expenses.
No bracing no other material shall be left in cofferdam in such a way as to extend into
the concrete of the structure.
Cofferdam located in embankments under the roadways shall be removed to an
elevation at least 1.2 m below the subgrade. Those located in a stream or lake and
within the limits of low water shall be removed to the elevation of the stream or lake
bed, except that in established navigation channels, they shall be removed to an

SECTION 900 EARTHWORKS Page 9-10

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

elevation at least 600 mm below the established bottom of the channel. Those located
outside the above defined limits shall be removed to an elevation at least 600 mm
below subgrade.
908 REFILLING OF FOUNDATION PITS AND TRENCHES, REMOVAL OF
SUPPORTS AND FILLING TO STRUCTURES
Refilling of foundation pits and trenches shall consist of previous backfill and/or common
backfill as shown on the Drawing or as directed by the Engineer.
(1) Materials
(a) Pervious Backfill
Unless otherwise specified in the contract, it shall of gravel, crushed gravel,
crushed rock, natural sands, manufactured sands or combinations thereof. It shall
conform to the grading limits set out in Table 9.1.

Table 9.1: Grading Limits of Pervious Backfill

Sieve Size
Percentage Passing by Weight
(mm)
40 100

10 45-100

2.36 25-80

0.60 8-48

0.075 0-6

(b) Common Backfill

Common backfill materials other than pervious backfill shall be suitable
material as defined in Sub-clause 902 (2).
(2) Method of Filling
Backfilling material shall be placed and compacted in layers in compliance with the
requirements of Clause 910. Any support structures for the excavation shall be
withdrawn as the filling proceeds unless described in the contract or ordered by the
Engineer to be left in. The backfill shall be placed in by such methods which shall
avoid loading the structure in any manner which may affect its stability or overload
its underlying foundation material or substructure. The backfill in front of abutments
and wing walls shall be placed first to avoid the Possibility of forward movement.
Precautions shall be taken to prevent any wedge action against upright surfaces, and
the slopes bounding the excavation shall be stepped as directed by the Engineer before
backfill is placed. The backfill material around box culverts, piers and curtain walls
shall be placed simultaneously on both sides of the structure. When the structure is so
designed that its strength is dependent on the restraining effect of the superstructure
(such as in portal frames and propped abutments), the backfill shall not be placed until

SECTION 900 EARTHWORKS Page 9-11

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

the superstructure has been completed to the extent and strength necessary to provide
the required restraint. When the Contract requires wedges between steel superstructure
and the parapet of wing type abutments, the wedges shall be placed in advance of
placing any fill above the lower 1/3 of the abutment and shall be removed when
directed by the Engineer.
909 FORMING OF EMBANKMENT AND OTHERS AREAS OF FILL
(1) The work shall consist of the construction of embankment, filling on other areas and
backfill not specified elsewhere by providing material as specified or approved by the
Engineer, placing, compacting and shaping to lines, levels, grades and cross sections
as shown on the Drawing or as directed by the Engineer. The maximum size of the
coarse material in the mixture shall not exceed 75 mm for general earth fill.
(2) The limits of embankment shall be built sufficiently wider than the design dimension
to facilitate in achieving required compaction nearby outer faces of the embankment.
The surplus material shall be trimmed to conform the specified side slopes and width
of the embankment.
(3) Where necessary, the original ground shall be scarified, mixed with water, levelled
and then compacted so as to achieve the density mentioned in Clause 910. Where the
height of embankment, as measured from formation level to the original ground level,
is less than 200 mm, the embankment foundation shall be compacted in accordance
with the requirements of Clause 910 such that the required compaction is achieved
within the upper 300 mm below formation level.
Where necessary, embankment foundations shall be excavated/furrowed and brought
under OMC and re-compacted in layers of 150 mm each in order to achieve the
required level of compaction.
(4) Embankments shall be built up evenly over the entire width and shall be maintained
at all times with a sufficient camber to enable surface water to drain rapidly from
them. Damage to compacted layers by constructional or other traffic shall be made
good by the Contractor.
(5) The natural moisture content and the optimum moisture content of the material to be
placed in the embankment shall be checked before start of the placing material. If
found to be out of the specified limits, the same shall be made good. Where water is
required to be added in such constructions, water shall be sprinkled uniformly and
thoroughly mixed in soil by blading or harrowing until a uniform moisture content as
specified is obtained.
Moisture content, checked in accordance with IS 2720 (Part 2), at the time of
compaction shall be between 90% and 105% of the Optimum Moisture Content as
determined in accordance with IS 2720 (Part 8).
If the material delivered for fill/backfill is too wet, it shall be dried by aeration and
exposure to sun, till the moisture content is acceptable for compaction. Should
circumstances arise, where owing to wet weather, the moisture content cannot be

SECTION 900 EARTHWORKS Page 9-12

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

reduced by the above procedure, compaction work shall be suspended.

If the material deposited as fill subsequently reaches a condition such that it cannot be
compacted in accordance with the requirements of the specifications the Contractor
shall
(i) Make good by removing the material off the embankment and placing suitable
material; or
(ii) Make good by tipping it elsewhere it elsewhere until it is in a suitable physical
condition for re-use; or
(iii) Make good the material by mechanical or chemical means to improve its
properties acceptable to the Engineer.
(6) Where fill is required to be constructed across water logged or soft clayey ground that
displays excessive movement under normal constructional equipment, it may be
necessary to construct a capping layer in accordance with Clause 1004.
(7) Rock use in rock fill embankments shall be deposited in horizontal layers not
exceeding 450 mm each extending up to the full width of the embankment.
Material shall be spread, levelled and compacted in accordance with Clause 910. Each
layer shall consist of reasonably graded rock and all surface voids shall be filled with
broken fragments before the next layer is placed. The top surface and side slopes of
embankments so formed shall be thoroughly blinded with approved well graded
material to seal the surface
(8) Isolated boulders each within the range of0.05 cubic meters in size may be
incorporated in embankments, not of rock fill, at the discretion of the Engineer
provided that the specified compaction requirements are met and it shall not be placed
less than 1 m below formation level of carriageways or shoulders.
While filling embankment up to or over culverts or pipe drains, and where required
in the contract, up to bridges, the Contractor shall bring the embankments up equally
on both sides. In rock fill embankments the rock shall be carefully packed for such
distance from the structure as is described in the contract.

Where provision of filter membrane is specified behind structures, the same shall be
laid in layers simultaneously with the laying of fill material.
(9) If the Contractor wishes to continue to use the surface of embankments including
shallow filling for constructional traffic before trimming to formation level, he shall
bring up and maintain the area between the extremities of the carriageway including
(if any) central reserve and hard shoulders to a level not less than 150 mm above
formation level whereupon constructional traffic shall be allowed to use the surface
and shall be made good by the Contractor at his own expense. When it is necessary
to complete the formation level and this has been done, the movement and use of
construction equipment thereon shall be in accordance with Clause 1103.

SECTION 900 EARTHWORKS Page 9-13

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

910 COMPACTION OF EMBANKMENT AND OTHER AREAS OF FILL/BACKFILL

(1) The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer approval of all fill layers before covering
with subsequent layers.
(2) All fill shall be compacted to the depth and degree of compaction as specified in
Table 9.2 or as shown on the Drawing. This requirement applies whether the
specified zone is in fill or in existing ground, except for any part which may fall
within rock or rock fill. Formation level if this context shall mean top of subgrade.
Table 9.2: Compaction Requirements
Location Depth below Minimum Compaction
Formation Level (%MDD Heavy
(mm) Compaction
Roadway Embankment 0-300 95
Roadway Cut 0-300 95
All other roadway fills and 93
backfill not separately specified
(3) Each layer of rock used to fill in embankments shall be spread and levelled in
accordance with Sub-clause 909 (7) and systematically compacted.
(4) Layers of material other than rock fill shall not exceed 150 mm compacted depth
unless and until the Contractor can demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that
he can successfully Compact layers of a greater thickness.
(5) Each layer shall be constructed in lengths suitable to the compaction and working
methods used. Materials of each layer shall be thoroughly mixed with water as
necessary to facilitate its compaction to the specified density.
(6) In cut areas, the subgrade shall be processed as necessary and compacted to the depth
and compaction requirements as given in Table 9.2. In the event that the Contractor is
unable to achieve the minimum compaction requirements below formation level he
shall excavate and re compact in layer as necessary.
(7) Where it may be impracticable to use to conventional rollers, the compaction shall be
carried out by appropriate mechanical means such as small vibratory rollers, power
rammers or plate compactor. Care shall be taken to ensure that the compaction
equipment does not hit or come too close to any structural member so as to cause any
damage to it.

911 COMPACTION TRIALS

(1) Before commencing filling embankment and from time to time as may be considered
necessary by the Engineer, the Contractor shall carry out compaction trials in the
presence of the Engineer on each of the main types of soil and rock fill to be used and
compacted in the Works. He shall carry out all necessary laboratory and field testing
as required by the Engineer and shall submit to the Engineer the results of all tests.

SECTION 900 EARTHWORKS Page 9-14

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

The trial procedure shall include the compaction of trial areas selected by the Engineer.
The surface of each area shall first be well compacted to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. Each type of material being used shall be compacted in equal layers at
uniform but differing moisture contents to a predetermined number of passes using
the Contractor’s proposed compaction equipment.
(2) Following completion of the compaction trials, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer, for his approval, his proposals for the compaction of each type of material
to be encountered in the Works and its degree of compaction specified. The
Contractor’s proposals shall include reference to the types of equipment, the operating
weights and type pressure, the methods of adjusting the moisture content, the number
of passes and the loose depth of each layer.
If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the results of the compaction trials indicate that the
Contractor’s proposed plant and methods shall achieve the densities as specified, the
Engineer shall approve the same. Otherwise the Contractor shall submit, in writing,
proposals for modifying the plant and/or methods and shall, if the Engineer so
requires, compact further trial areas in accordance with these modified proposals until
the Engineer approves of Contractor’s proposals.
(4) When compaction of earthworks is in progress, the Contractor shall adhere to the
compaction procedure approved by the Engineer.
(5) Notwithstanding the Engineer’s approval of any of the Contractor’s plant or methods,
the Contractor shall at all times be solely responsible for executing the earthworks in
accordance with the Specifications and the Drawing.
912 BENCHING
(1) Where embankment is to be constructed on hill slopes or slopes with more than or
equal to 1 vertical to 4 horizontal slopes, benches with vertical and horizontal faces
shall be cut into the existing slope (including rock) and the embankment shall be built
up in successive layers. Where the cross slope is less than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal
slope (other than rock) shall be loosened by scarifying to a depth of not less than 100
mm measured perpendicular to the slope, to ensure a good bond between the
embankment and the embankment foundation. Material which has been loosened shall
be covered with the first layer and compacted to the specified density simultaneously
with the first layer of embankment material placed.
(2) Where existing embankment are to be widened or included in a new embankment and
slopes are not more than 1 vertical to 4 horizontals, the slope of the existing
embankment shall be scarified to a depth of not less than 100 mm to ensure bond.
Where the slope is less than 1 vertical to 4 horizontals, continuous horizontal benches,
each at least 300 mm wide, shall be cut in existing slopes and the widened
embankment shall be built up in successive layers of thickness of 150 mm to the level
of old road.
Where the width of the widened portions is insufficient to permit the use of heavy
rollers, compaction to the specified density shall be carried out with the help of small

SECTION 900 EARTHWORKS Page 9-15

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

vibratory roller/plate compactor/rammer or other approved methods.

913 EARTHWORKS TO BE KEPT FREE OF WATER
By providing temporary water course, ditches, drains, pumping or other means the
Contractor shall arrange for the rapid dispersal of water from the areas of earthworks. Where
practicable the water shall be discharged into permanent outfall for the drainage system.
Adequate means for trapping silt shall be provided on temporary systems while discharging
into permanent drainage systems.
914 WATERCOURSES
Excavations carried out in the diversion, enlargement, deepening or straightening of
watercourses shall include the operations of any necessary trimming of slopes, grading of
beds, disposal of excavated materials and pumping, tampering works and materials
necessary for dealing with the flow of water.
915 FILLING EXISTING WATERCOURSES
Where watercourses have to be diverted from the sites of embankments or other works, the
original channels shall be cleared of all vegetable growths and soft deposits and filled in
with suitable materials deposited and compacted as specified in Clauses 909 and 910.
916 PROCESS CONTROL
(1) Throughout the works the Contractor shall perform tests to determine the suitability
and compaction characteristics of soils to be used in roadway. The maximum dry
density (MDD) and Optimum moisture content (OMC) test shall be conducted in
accordance with IS 2720 Part 8 as specified in table 5.2.
(2) In addition to the foregoing tests, the Contractor shall carry out field density tests on
the compacted fill materials in accordance with IS 2720 part 28/29. As specified in
Table 5.2 and shall be carried out in each layer, including original ground surface on
which embankment is to be constructed. If the result of any test shows that the
minimum specified density has not been achieved, further compaction shall be
executed to the area concerned and the layer re-tested. Unless the test results are
satisfactory, the addition of another layer shall not be allowed.
(3) The Contractor shall carry out tests for determination of moisture content at frequent
intervals on all materials during the course of compaction as per Sub-clause 909 (5)
to ensure that the requirements of Clause 910 are met with.
917 MEASUREMNT
(1) The quantities of the various classes of earthwork to be measured for payment under
the contract shall be limited to the lines, grades, slopes and dimensions shown on the
Drawing or as determined by the Engineer.
(2) Except for foundation, all roadway excavation including side drains, filling and
backfilling compacted in place shall be measured in cubic meters by the average end
area method as computed from the original and final cross-sections of the completed
work. The distance between two end areas shall be the distance measured along central

SECTION 900 EARTHWORKS Page 9-16

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

line of the road. Where due to changed conditions, or the nature of a particular
operation, or for any other reason, it is impossible or impractical to measure the
quantities by means of average end areas, the Engineer shall compute the quantities
by a volumetric method, if in his opinion, it is the best suited method to obtain an
accurate determination.
No separate measurement for payment shall be made for excavation made on borrows,
quarries, temporary works or in places outside the scope of permanent works specified
in the contract.
Foundation excavation for structures shall be measured in cubic meters irrespective of
all classes of materials except rock encountered. The quantities to be measured shall
be the net cubic content of the voids formed by the removal of the materials enclosed
between the bottom of the footing and existing ground level by a surface generated by
vertical lines passing through the periphery of the bottom of the footing. No payment
shall be made for any excavation other than the limited excavation described above.
Excavation over increased width or length, cutting of slopes, removal of slides,
shoring, shuttering and planking shall be deemed as convenience for the Contractor in
executing the work and shall not be measured and paid for. Backfill to be measured
shall be limited to this void only with due consideration of the nature of the structure.
Foundation excavation in rock shall be deemed to be covered by the rate for rock
excavation.
(3) Consumption of explosive materials, levelling, watering and compaction of original
ground, construction of coffer dams, pumping out water and other ancillary and
incidental works necessary to complete the item as per this specification shall not be
measured for payment. They are deemed included in the measurement of the
concerned item.
(4) Unless stated otherwise, Lead and Lift of excavated materials for disposal shall not be
measured for payment. They are deemed to be included in the quoted rates for the
earthwork operations irrespective of haulage distance and lift height.
918 PAYMENT
(1) Various classes of earthworks i.e. roadway excavation, roadway filling, backfilling,
additional leads and lifts measured as described above shall be paid at contract unit
rate of the respective item.
The contract unit rates shall be the full and the final compensation to the Contractor
as per Clause 112 and for the cost of:
(i) Arrangement of land as source of materials as much as needed.
(ii) Process Control tests.
(iii) Execution of all relevant operations described above in this Section and
necessary to complete the item as per this specification.
(2) Foundation excavation for structures, measured as described above, shall be paid for

SECTION 900 EARTHWORKS Page 9-17

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

at the contract unit rate for all classes of excavation. The contract unit rate for
foundation excavation shall be the full and the final compensation to the Contractor as
per Clause 112 and for the cost of carrying out the required operations to excavate to
the lines and levels as required by the Drawing or as directed by the Engineer. No
payment shall be made for the disposal of the excavated materials irrespective of all
leads and lifts, preparation of foundation base, cofferdams, cribs, sheeting, shoring
and bracing, foundation sealing, dewatering including pumping, removal of logs and
stumps, cleaning and grubbing, diversion of flow/channel, if required and all
incidentals works necessary to complete the item in accordance with this
Specification.

SECTION 900 EARTHWORKS Page 9-18

SECTION 1000 – SUBGRADES 1

1001. SCOPE................................................................................................................................................1

1002. DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................................................1

1003. PREPARATION AND SURFACE TREATMENT OF FORMATION ............................................1

1004. CAPPING LAYER .............................................................................................................................3

1005. MECHANICAL STABLISATION ....................................................................................................4

1006. LIME STABILISATION ...................................................................................................................7

1007. MEASUREMENT ............................................................................................................................ 13

1008. PAYMENT ....................................................................................................................................... 13

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

SECTION 1000 – SUBGRADES

1001. SCOPE
This Section deals with the treatment of the upper layers of earthworks including preparation
and surface treatment of the formation, the addition of layers of selected material, the
improvement of in-situ materials by addition and mixing of selected materials or by addition
and mixing of lime.
1002. DEFINITIONS
(1) Formation Level
The level of the top surface of the subgrade upon which pavement structures is built
up.
(2) Subgrade
Up to 500 mm below formation (Lowest level of pavement crust) level is designated
as “subgrade”.
(3) Capping Layers
Capping layers are layers of specified materials to be laid and compacted in the
subgrade and below as required, in replacement of in-situ materials to achieve CBR
conforming to Clause 609, Table 6.2.
(4) Stabilizer
The selected natural or crushed material, lime, cement and other similar materials to
be mixed into the in-situ material of the subgrade is defined as the “stabilizer”.
(5) Mechanical Stabilization
The addition and mixing of natural or crushed material to improve the in-situ material
of the subgrade.
(6) Lime Stabilization
The addition and mixing of lime to improve in-situ material of the subgrade such as
in-situ material with a CBR is less than 5% or saturated soils.
(7) Treated Materials
Following the addition of stabilizer to the in-situ materials, the material is referred to
as “treated material”. Treated materials may be either mechanically stabilized, lime
stabilized, cement stabilized, or so on.
1003. PREPARATION AND SURFACE TREATMENT OF FORMATION
Preparation and surface treatment of formation shall be carried out only after completion of
all drainage works unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer and prior to laying the sub base
or the base where no sub base is required. The sequence of operations shall be as follows:
(1) Formation of Loose Untreated Materials
Materials for use in the subgrade shall not contain particles larger than 60 mm. In
addition, the material shall have a CBR of not less than 5% measured after a 4-day

SECTION 1000 SUBGRADES Page 10-1

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

soak on a laboratory mix compacted to 95% MDD (heavy compaction), a swell of less
than 1%, a plasticity index of less than 40% and an organic matter content less than
3%. In-situ material in the subgrade in cutting that does not meet these requirements
shall either be spoiled or, if suitable, placed in the embankment. The spoiled material
shall be replaced with material meeting the requirements for loose material in the
subgrade.
In fill areas, and in cutting except otherwise instructed by the Engineer, according to
the material encountered, loose materials of the embankment and cuttings shall be
deposited in the layers of 150 mm compacted depth. Each layer shall extend
reasonably more than the full width of the embankments or cutting and shall be
compacted in accordance with requirements as specified hereunder: -
(a) The material shall be broken down to the above specified grading and any
oversize material which cannot be broken down to the require size shall be
removed and disposed off. The material shall be scarified and the moisture
content shall be adjusted by either uniformly mixing in water or drying out the
material such that the moisture content during compaction is between 95% and
100% of the Optimum Moisture Content. The moisture content shall be kept
within these limits until compaction is complete except where otherwise
instructed by the Engineer.
(b) Each layer shall be compacted to a dry density equal to at least 95% MDD (heavy
compaction).
(c) In accordance with Section 500, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer his
proposals for the compaction of the material to be used in the subgrade. The
proposal shall be based on the type of plant, the range of passes and the loose
depth of the layer.
The Contractor shall carry out site compaction trials, supplemented by necessary
laboratory investigations, and shall satisfy the Engineer that all the specified
requirements regarding compaction shall be achieved.
Site compaction trials shall be completed and approved by the Engineer before
the permanent Works commences.
(d) Testing to be carried out during the construction of subgrade shall include the
following:
i. The MDD (heavy compaction), Field density and OMC shall be determined
for each new material encountered as specified in Table 5.2. The test of field
density shall be conducted in staggered manner i.e. at left, at crown and at
right in the carriageway.
ii. The soaked CBR of material in the subgrade shall be determined as per Table
5.2 for each layer.
The Contractor shall request in writing for the Engineer’s approval for each layer in
accordance with Sub-clause 509 (1) and such request shall be accompanied by the tests

SECTION 1000 SUBGRADES Page 10-2

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

results of the above described testing and all additional relevant information required.
If the results are as specified, he will approve for addition of another layer or will ask
for further tests or rework to meet the requirements.
(2) Formation of Loose Treated Materials
The sequence of operation shall be as described in Clauses 1005 to 1006 of this
Specification.
(3) Formation in Rock Cutting
The subgrade in rock cutting shall be regulated after trimming the rock excavation by
a regulating course of minimum 150 mm compacted depth of natural complying with
the requirements of natural material for sub base as specified in Sub-clause 1201 (3).
The regulating course shall be laid, compacted and tested in accordance with Clause
1201 and the surface regularity shall meet the requirements of Clause 1101.
(4) Preparation of Formation for Rehabilitation Works
After reinforcement of any soft areas, all surface below carriageways, lay-bys, cycle
tracks, footways and hard shoulders shall be well cleaned and freed from mud a slurry
(5) Surface Regularity and Tolerances
The surface regularity and tolerance of the subgrade shall meet the requirements of
Clause 1101.
When each layer is completed the Contractor shall comply with the requirements of
Clause 510 for requesting the Engineer’s approval and protecting the layer.
1004. CAPPING LAYER
Where shown on the Drawing or where in-situ material in the subgrade in cutting does not
meet the requirements, in-situ materials shall be replaced with selected material from
cuttings or borrow pits.
Where materials of differing quality are available for placing in the embankments, the
Engineer may also instruct that certain materials should be excluded from the subgrade and
that certain materials should be set part, or obtained from borrow pits for use in the upper
layers.
When materials for subgrade are extracted from borrows to form the capping layers they
shall be natural material complying with the following requirements: -
(1) Material classification
Materials used for use in capping layers shall be selected among soils classified as
GW, GP, GC, and SW in the General Classification of Soils, described in Clause 609.
(2) Material Requirements
Material for use in the capping layers shall not contain particles larger than 75 mm and
their percentage passing by weight the 0.075 mm sieve shall be less than 15%. The
material shall have a CBR of not less than 15% measured after a 4-day soak on a

SECTION 1000 SUBGRADES Page 10-3

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

laboratory mix compacted to 95 % MDD (heavy compaction), a swell of less than 1%,
a plasticity index of less than 12%.
(3) Laying and Compaction
The material shall be deposited in the layer of 150 mm compacted depth. Each layer
shall extend over the full width of the embankments or cutting and shall be compacted
in accordance with the requirements specified in Sub-clause 1003 (1) (a) to (d).
(4) Tolerances
Tolerances of capping layers shall be in accordance with Sub-clause 1003 (5)
When each layer is completed the Contractor shall comply with Clause 510 for
requesting the Engineer’s approval and protecting the layer.
1005. MECHANICAL STABLISATION
(1) General
The extent of the mechanical stabilization shall be detailed in the Special
Specification or shown on the Drawing.
In-situ subgrade materials subject to mechanical stabilization shall be generally soils
classified as SM, ML, CL, MH, CH in the General Classification of Soils described in
Clause 609 with a CBR less than 5% or a moisture content close to saturation or too
high moisture content to meet the compaction requirements as set out in Sub-clause
1003 (1).
(2) Material Requirement
(a) Stabilizer (Additive Material)
Additive material shall be gravel, crushed stone/gravel or sand, according to the
type and characteristics of the in-situ soil as shown in the Table 10.1.
It may be crushed stone/crushed gravel, (CS) discarded material from primary
crushing, or screened stone (SS) from debris and screes.
Sand may be soils classified as SP, SW in the General Classification of Soil
described in Clause 610 or Sand (SSFF) obtained by screening the discarded fine
fraction of primary crushing.
Gravel 12/40 shall have a percentage in weight passing the 12 mm sieve less
than 20% and a percentage in weight passing the 40 mm sieve more than 85%.
Sand shall have a Sand Equivalent more than 60.
Table 10.1: Type of Additive Material
In-situ soil stabilizers (Additive material)
Gravel Sand
SM CS, SS, 12/40
ML CS, SS, 12/40
CL CS, SS, 12/40
MH SP, SW, SSFF
CH SP,SW, SSFF

SECTION 1000 SUBGRADES Page 10-4

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

(b) Stabilized Material Requirements

The amount of stabilizer shall be determined by the Engineer after laboratory
test
The mechanically stabilized materials after mixing and compacting shall
conform to the following
 Maximum size of particles 60 mm
 Uniformity Coefficient min 5
 CBR at 95% MDD (heavy compaction) 
measured after 4 days’ soak min 25 %
 Swell max 1%
(3) Amount of stabilizers to be added
The amount of stabilizer to be added shall be generally between 15% and 25% in
weight of the in-situ material and shall be determined by the Engineer following
laboratory trials, and site trials to be carried out by the Contractor in accordance with
Section 500.
During the site trials, the control testing requirements shall be in accordance with
Clause 507 and in addition, each set of test shall include the following:
 The MDD (heavy compaction) and OMC determined on the mixed material before
compaction.
The CBR at 95% MDD (heavy compaction) after 4 days’ soak.
(4) Mixing
(a) Mixing Equipment
The equipment for scarifying the in-situ material and mixing it with the
stabilizer, such as scarifies and grades, shall be capable of scarifying the
materials and mixing it with the stabilizer to the full depth of the loose layer
necessary to give the specified thickness of compacted material mixed and
compacted in accordance with this Clause.
The equipment shall be only acceptable, if during the site trials carried out in
accordance with Section 500, it produces the material to the specified
requirements.
(b) Preparation of the Layer
Before the stabilizer is applied, the material to be treated shall be scarified. If
required or instructed by the Engineer, oversize material shall be removed or
broken down so that the maximum size of the particles is not more than specified.
(c) Spreading the Stabilizer
After the layer to be treated has been prepared, the stabilizer shall be uniformly
spread over the width to be worked at the specified rate.

SECTION 1000 SUBGRADES Page 10-5

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

(d) Mixing and Watering

After the stabilizer has been spread, it shall be thoroughly and intimately mixed
into the material for the full depth of the layer. Mixing shall continue until the
resulting mixture forms a homogeneous filth.
Care shall be taken both during mixing and subsequent watering operations so
that the underlying layer is not disturbed. No material from the underlying layer
is mixed with that being processed.
If watering is necessary to bring the mixture to the required moisture content,
this shall be done after spreading and mixing with the stabilizer. Water shall be
added in a uniform and controllable manner and, where necessary, in successive
increments. Each increment shall be mixed in as a separate mixing operation.
Concentration of water at any point or a flow of water over the surface shall be
avoided.
Any part of the mixture which becomes too wet for compaction shall be allowed
to dry out until its moisture content is satisfactory for compaction.
Throughout the process of mixing the stabilizer and watering, a uniform
thickness of the mixture shall be maintained and, if necessary, the mixture shall
be graded to maintain the correct un-compacted thickness and shape. Any part
of the mixture that becomes segregated shall be removed and replaced.
(5) Compaction
(a) Thickness of Layers
The subgrade shall be constructed in the layer of 150 mm compacted depth.
(b) Compaction Requirements
The minimum density for mechanically stabilized materials shall be 95% MDD
(Heavy compaction). The moisture content at the time of compaction shall be
between 97% and 103% of Optimum Moisture Content.
(c) Finishing
The surface finish after compaction of any treated layer shall be free from ridges,
compaction planes, laminations, loose and segregated material and other surface
irregularities and shall be to the line and the level within the tolerances as
specified in Clause 1101. If the surface fails to meet the requirements of this
Specification, the Contractor shall take the action set out in the appropriate part
of Section 1100 or such other action as the Engineer may instruct, or agree.
(6) Construction Control Testing
(a) In-situ Material
The following properties of subgrade material shall be determined as per Table
5.2.:
 Grading,

SECTION 1000 SUBGRADES Page 10-6

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

 Moisture Content,
 Atterberg limits,
 The MDD (heavy compaction) and MOC,
 The CBR at 95% MDD (heavy compaction) after 4 days’ soak.
(b) Stabilizer
The following properties of the additive material shall be determined as per
Table 5.2 and when in opinion of the Engineer the nature of the material is
changed
 Grading,
 SE
(c) Control of Mixing
Prior to compaction in every 400 m2 or part thereof the following properties shall
be determined on each new treated material used after mixing for subgrade of
each layer.
 The MDD (heavy compaction) and OMC,
 The CBR at 95% MDD (heavy compaction) after 4 days’ soak.
(d) Control after Completion of Each Layer
The field dry density shall be determined as specified in Table 5.2 of compacted
subgrade in staggered manner i.e. at left, at crown and at right in the carriageway.
(7) Tolerances
(a) Geometric Tolerances
As specified in Clause 1101.
(b) Amount of Stabilizer
The average amount of stabilizer, measured before mixing, over a length of 100
m, shall not be less than the amount specified.
The average amount of stabilizer, in the treated material, measured at five points
over a length of 100 m, shall not be less than the amount specified.

1006. LIME STABILISATION

(1) General
The extent of lime stabilization shall be as detailed in the Special Specification or as
shown on the Drawing In-situ subgrade materials subject to lime stabilization shall be
generally soils classified as ML, CL, MH, CH in the General Classification of Soil
described in Clause 609, with a CBR less than 5% or a moisture content close to
saturation.
(2) Material Requirements
(a) Lime

SECTION 1000 SUBGRADES Page 10-7

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Lime shall comply with the requirements of Clause 615.

Quick like shall be used on in-situ materials which have a CBR less than 2% and
which moisture content is close to saturation.
Hydrated lime shall be used on in-situ materials which have CBR between 2%
and 5%.
(b) Storage and Handling
All lime shall be kept under cover and protected from moisture. Consignments
shall be use in the same sequence as they received at the site. Damaged stocks or
stored on the site for more than 3 months shall not be used. The Contractor shall
replace them at his own cost. Operators and labour shall be provided with
protective shoes, clothing, masks, gloves and goggles when they work with lime.
(c) Requirement of Lime Treated Materials
The lime treated materials after mixing and compacting shall conform to the
following requirements:
Maximum size of particles : 20 mm
 CBR at 95% MDD (heavy compaction)
measured after 4 days’ soak : min 15%
 Swell : max. 1%
(3) Amount of Lime to be added
The amount of lime to be added shall be determined by the Engineer following
laboratory and site trials to be carried out by the Contractor in accordance with Section
500.
For the laboratory trials, the requirements of lime treated materials shall be as specified
in Sub-clause 1006 (2) (c) except for that the CBR at 95% MDD (heavy compaction)
measured on a laboratory mix after 3 days curing at ambient temperature and 4 days’
soak which shall not be less than 30%.
During the site trials, the control testing requirements shall be in accordance with
Clause 507 and in addition, each set of test shall include the following:
The MDD (heavy compaction) OMC determined on the mixed material before
compaction,

The CBR at 95% MDD (heavy compaction) after 3 days curing at ambient temperature
and 4 days’ soak shall not be less than 15%.
(4) Mixing
(a) Mixing Equipment
The equipment for pulverizing the in-situ material and mixing in the stabilizer
shall be purpose-built equipment capable of pulverizing the materials and mixing

SECTION 1000 SUBGRADES Page 10-8

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

in the stabilizer to the full depth of the loose layer necessary to give the specified
thickness of compacted material mixed and compacted in accordance with this
Clause.
The equipment shall be only acceptable, if during the site trials carried out in
accordance with Section 500, it can produce the material of the specified
requirements.
The mixers shall be equipped with a device for controlling the depth of
processing and mixing blades shall be maintained or reset periodically so that
the correct depth of mixing is obtained at all times.
Mixing by grader shall not be permitted.
(b) Preparation of the Layer
Before the stabilizer is applied, the material to be treated shall be scarified and/or
spread and broken down and oversize material shall be removed or broken down
so that the maximum size of the particles is not more than the specified. The
material shall first be pulverized to the required filth by successive passes. Then
it shall be shaped true to line, grade and cross Section and, if required, lightly
compacted. The loose thickness shall be such as to give specified thickness after
full compaction has been carried out.
The moisture content of the layer before addition of the stabilizer shall be
adjusted to within the range of 80% to 90% of the OMC.
(c) Spreading the Stabilizer
After the layer to be treated has been prepared to the satisfaction of the Engineer,
the stabilizer shall be uniformly spread at specified rate over the width to be
worked at a time. If a spreader is used to spread the stabilizer ahead of the mixer,
it shall be fitted with a device to ensure a uniform and controllable rate of spread
both transversely and longitudinally.
Only sufficient stabilizer for immediate use shall be spread ahead of the mixing
operation. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, any part becomes defective, the
Contractor shall replace the material of that part as his own cost and shall rework
to meet the requirements.
Only equipment actually used in the spreading or mixing operation shall be
allowed to pass over the stabilizer, when so spread before it had been mixed into
the material to be treated.
(d) Mixing and Watering
Immediately after the stabilizer has been spread, it shall be thoroughly and
intimately mixed into the material for the full depth of the layer. Mixing shall
continue until the resulting mixture forms a fine and homogeneous tilth. The
mixing machine shall be set so that it cuts at least 100 mm into the edge of any
adjoining lane processed previously so as to ensure that all the material forming
the layer has been properly processed.

SECTION 1000 SUBGRADES Page 10-9

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Care shall be taken during mixing and subsequent watering operations that the
underlying layer is not disturbed and that no material from the underlying layer
is mixed with that being processed.
If watering is necessary to bring the mixture to the required moisture content,
then this shall be done after spreading and mixing in the stabilizer. Water shall
be added in a uniform and controllable manner and, where necessary, in
successive increments. Each increment shall be mixed in as a separate mixing
operation. Concentration of water at any point or flow of water over the surface
shall be avoided.
Any part of the mixture becomes too wet after the stabilizer has been added
and/or before the mixture is compacted shall be allowed to dry out until its
moisture content is satisfactory. This part shall be retreated with fresh stabilizer
and finished off in accordance with this Clause.
Throughout the process of mixing in the stabilizer and water, a uniform thickness
of the mixture shall be maintained and, if necessary, the mixture shall be graded
to maintain the correct un-compacted thickness and shape. Any part of the
mixture that becomes segregated shall be replaced by new one.
(e) Manual Mixing
Where manual mixing is permitted the soil from borrow area shall be freed of all
vegetation and other deleterious matters and placed on the prepared surface. The
soil shall then be pulverized by means of crow bars, pickaxes or other means
approved by the Engineer.
Water in requisite quantities may be sprinkled on the soil for aiding
pulverization. On the pulverized soil the blending material (lime) in requisite
quantities shall be spread uniformly and mixed thoroughly by working with
spades or other similar tools till the whole mass is uniform. After adjusting the
moisture content to be within the limits mentioned later the mixed material shall
be levelled up to the required thickness so that it is ready to be rolled.
(5) Compaction and Finishing
For lime treated materials, final compaction and finishing shall be completed within 4
hours after the lime comes into contact with the material to be treated.
(a) Thickness of Layers
The subgrade shall be constructed in the layers of 150 mm compacted depth
each.
(b) Compaction Requirements
The minimum density for lime treated materials shall be 97% MDD (Heavy
compaction). The moisture content at the time of compaction shall be between
95% and 100% of Optimum Moisture Content.
(c) Finishing

SECTION 1000 SUBGRADES Page 10-10

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

The surface finish after compaction of any treated layer shall be free from ridges,
compaction planes, laminations, loose and segregated material and other surface
irregularities and shall be to the line and the level within the tolerances as
specified in Clause 1101. If the surface fails to meet the requirements of this
Specification, the Contractor shall take appropriate action to set out to comply
with the requirements of the Section 1100 or agree with other action as the
Engineer may instruct.
(6) Joints between New and Existing Work
The forming of construction joints and the protection of previously treated or other
work shall be carried out so as to produce a uniformly compacted and homogeneous
layer free from ridges or other irregularities.
Full working width, without longitudinal joints, will generally be required. Half
working width may be instructed by the Engineer to pass traffic. When forming
longitudinal joints at least 100 mm of the first laid half-width layer shall be retreated
and mixed in with the layer of second half-width.
When forming transverse joints, at least 1.0 m length of the previously laid work shall
be incorporated into the new treated layer and the Engineer may instruct that the
percentage of stabilizer be increased at these places.
(7) Protection and Curing
Treated layers shall be kept continuously damp by lightly spraying with water or
adhering to one of the curing systems specified below.
Treated layers shall be protected, within 8 hours of completion by one of the following
methods:
(a) Completely covering the layer with clear or light coloured approved polythene
sheeting of minimum thickness 0.1 mm. The sheeting shall be laid to cover the
whole of the surface of the layer. At joints the sheeting shall be lapped by at least
500 mm and any damaged sheeting shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.
The sheeting shall be securely held in contact with the layer by an approved
method.
(b) Completely covering the treated material with a layer of damp uncompact gravel
or soil material of minimum thickness 100 mm. The material which may form
part of the next layer, shall be kept continuously damp.
Plant used for dumping and spreading material, and spraying water shall be
approved by the Engineer and shall have individual axle loads not exceeding 6
tons.
Immediately prior to application of a curing system the surface of the treated
layer shall be made thoroughly damp by lightly spraying water.
The curing system shall be kept in place and intact for a minimum of 7 days after
completion of compaction. Shall areas may be temporarily removed for the

SECTION 1000 SUBGRADES Page 10-11

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

purposes of carrying out control testing but only for the minimum amount of
time required for the testing.
(8) Construction Control Testing/Process Control Testing
(a) In-situ Material
The following properties shall be determined for the subgrade material as per
Table 5.2:
 Grading, Moisture Content, Atterberg limits,
 The MDD (heavy compaction) and OMC.
 The CBR at 95% MDD (heavy compaction) after 4 days’ soak.
(b) Lime
Lime shall be tested in accordance with Clause 615 for each consignment
delivered at the site.
(c) Control of Mixing
The following properties shall be determined after mixing on every new treated
material used for subgrade and in every 400 m2 and part thereof of each layer of
mixed material prior to compaction:
 The MDD (heavy compaction) and OMC
 The CBR at 95% MDD (heavy compaction) after 3 days curing at ambient
temperature and 4 days’ soak which shall be not less than 15%.
(d) Control of Compaction
The field dry density shall be determined in each layer of compacted subgrade
in a staggered manner i.e. left, at crown and at right in the carriageway.
(9) Traffic
Traffic or equipment other than that actually engaged in the various treatment or
protection processes, shall not run over the layer bring processed or compacted.
On compaction of curing, no traffic or equipment shall be allowed on the treated layer
with the exception of that required for priming or construction of the subsequent layer.
(10) Tolerances
(a) Geometric Tolerances
The work shall be completed within tolerance as specified in Sub-clause 1003
(6).
(b) Amount of Stabilizer
The average amount of stabilizer, measured before mixing, over a length of 100
m, shall not be less than the amount instructed by the Engineer.
The average amount of stabilizer, in the treated material, measured at five points
over a length of 100 m, shall not be less than the amount instructed by the

SECTION 1000 SUBGRADES Page 10-12

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Engineer
The amount of stabilizer, measured at any point after mixing may vary within ±
3 % of the amount instructed by the Engineer.
(c) Determination of Stabilizer Content
The lime content in mixed materials shall be determined according to IS: 2720.
1007. MEASUREMENT
(1) Subgrade construction with loose untreated/treated materials, formation in rock
cutting shall be measured in cubic meter by taking cross Sections at intervals of 10
meters or as directed by the Engineer in the original position before the work starts
and after its completion and computing the volumes of the respective work in cubic
meters by average end area method.
(2) Preparation of formation for rehabilitation works shall be measured in square meter.
(3) Capping layer shall be measured in cubic meter by end area method as described in
Sub-clause 1007 (1).
(4) Mechanically stabilized subgrade shall be measured in cubic meter as described in
Sub-clause 1007 (1) and shall be exclusive of the measurement on the stabilizer.
Stabilizers (additive material) such as gravel, crushed stone/gravel or sand shall be
measured in cubic meter as per procedure described below.
(a) Before mixing the stabilizer (i.e. gravel, crushed stone/gravel sand) quantity to
be used shall be measured in stacks or in the body of transporting trucks/trippers,
if it can be measured.
(b) In a length of 100 m five standard holes at the equal distances shall be dig up
and materials shall be collected separately from each hole. The average
percentage of stabilizer obtained from each hole shall be worked out. Based on
average percentage of stabilizer and volume treated total quantity of stabilizer
used shall be computed.
Least of the quantities computed in (a) and (b) above shall be accepted for payment.
(5) The volume of lime stabilized material shall be measured in cubic meter as per end area
method inclusive of lime used. The lime used shall be measured in ton.
(6) Quick lime/Hydrated
Lime (stabilizer) shall be measured in ton as per actual consumption.

1008. PAYMENT
The subgrade construction with loose untreated/treated materials, formation in rock cutting,
additive materials and stabilizers, preparation of formation, capping layer, mechanically
stabilized subgrade, and lime stabilized material shall be paid at their respective contract
unit rate which shall be the full and the final compensation to the Contractor as per Clause
112 and also for the cost of:

SECTION 1000 SUBGRADES Page 10-13

(1) Arrangement of land as a source of supply and material required
(2) Compacting the ground supporting subgrade where
removal and replacement of unsuitable material or
loosening and re compacting is involved.
(3) Watering or drying of material in the subgrade as required.
(4) Mixing, spreading in layers brining in appropriate
moisture content and compacting to the requirement of
Clause 1003.
(5) All other operations including incidental costs necessary
to complete the item as per this Specification.
 SECTION 1200: SUBBASE, BASE, HARD SHOULDER AND GRAVEL WEARING
COURSE ........................................................................................................................
1

1201 GRANULAR SUBBASE ....................................................................................................................1

1202 CEMENT TREATED SOIL SUB-BASE/BASE ................................................................................4

1203 WATER BOUND MACADAM BASE AND SUB-BASE ..................................................................8

1204 CRUSHER-RUN MACADAM FOR BASE AND SUBBASE ......................................................... 13

1205 SHOULDER ISLANDS AND MEDIAN .......................................................................................... 15

1206 TELFORD BASE (BLOCK PITCHING) ........................................................................................ 17

1207 DRY BOUND MACADAM BASE AND SUB-BASE ...................................................................... 18

1208 WET MIX MACADAM BASE AND SUBBASE ............................................................................. 21

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

SECTION 1200: SUBBASE, BASE, HARD SHOULDER AND GRAVEL

WEARING COURSE
1201 GRANULAR SUBBASE
(1) Scope
This Clause covers the construction of subbase with naturally occurring quarzitic
gravel, river gravels and transported gravels, or materials resulting from the
weathering of rocks, or clayey/silty sand.
(2) Sources of Materials
The material to be used for the work shall be natural sand, crushed gravel, and crushed
stone, crushed slag or combination thereof depending upon the grading requirement.
Sub base materials shall be obtained from approved sources in borrow or cut or from
such other sources of supply as may be specified or approved from time to time for
use.
The Contractor shall comply with all requirements of Section 800 in respect of borrow
pits.
(3) Material Requirements
The material shall be free from organic or other deleterious constituents and shall
confirm to the grading given in Table 12.1 and physical Requirement 12.2. Gradings
III and IV shall preferably be used in lower sub-base. Gradings V and VI shall be used
as sub-base cum drainage layer. Where the sub-base is laid in two layers as upper sub-
base and lower sub-base, the thickness of each layer shall not be laess than 150 mm.
Grading to be adopted for a project shall be as specified in the Contract.

Table 12.1: Grading Envelope for Granular sub base material

Sieve Size
As per IS
Percentage passing by weight
designati
on (mm)
Grading Grading Grading Grading Grading
Grading VI
I II III IV V
75 100 100
53 80-100 100 100 100 80-100 100
26.5 55-90 79-90 55-75 50-80 55-90 75-100
9.5 35-65 50-80 35-65 55-75
4.75 25-55 40-65 10-30 15-35 25-50 30-55
2.36 20-40 30-50 10-20 10-25
0.85 2-10
0.425 10-15 10-15 0-5 0-8
0.075 <5 <5 <5 <5 0-3

SECTION 1200 SUBBASE, BASE, HARD SHOULDER AND GRAVEL WEARING COURSE Page 12-1
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Table 12.2: Physical Requirement for Materials for Granular Sub-base

Physical Test method Requirement for Requirement for Class III , IV
properties Class I & II and maintenance work
Aggregate Impact IS 2386-4 or IS 5640 Maximum 40 Maximum 45
Value (AIV)
Liquid Limit IS 2720-5 maximum 25 maximum 25

Plasticity Index IS 2720-5 Maximum 6 Maximum 6

CBR at 95 % dry IS 2720-5 Minimum 30 unless Minimum 25 unless specified in the

density ( at IS specified in the Contract
2720- part8) Contract

(4) Compaction Trials

Before commencing construction and from time to time as may be considered
necessary by the Engineer, the Contractor shall carry out compaction trials in the
presence of Engineer on each main types of materials to be compacted in the Works.
He shall carry out all necessary laboratory and field testing and supply the Engineer
with the copies of the results of all tests.
Following completion of the compaction trials, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer, for his approval, proposals for the compaction of each main type of material.
The Contractor’s Proposals shall include reference to the type of equipment, the
operating weights and tyre pressures and the method of adjusting moisture content.
If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the results of the compaction trials indicate that the
Contractor’s proposed plant and methods shall achieve the densities specified, the
Engineer shall approve the same. Otherwise the Contractor shall submit in writing
proposals for modifying the plant and/or methods and shall compact further trials in
accordance with these modified proposals until the Engineer approves the
Contractor’s proposals.
(5) Laying and Compacting
Immediately before laying the sub base material, the underlying layer shall be checked
by the Contractor for any damage or deficiencies, which shall be made good as
instructed by the Engineer.
The material shall be deposited in such quantity and spread in a uniform layer across
the full width required, so that the final compacted thickness is nowhere less than
shown on the Drawing or instructed by the Engineer. Every reasonable effort shall be
made to prevent segregation during mixing, dumping, spreading, trimming and
compacting operations.
The compacted thickness of any layer laid, processed and compacted at one time shall
not exceed 150 mm and when a greater compacted thickness is required, the material
shall be laid and processed in two or more layers. The minimum layer thickness shall
be 100 mm.
The material shall be down to the grading specified in Sub-clause 1201 (3). Any
oversize material which cannot be broken down to the required size shall be removed

SECTION 1200 SUBBASE, BASE, HARD SHOULDER AND GRAVEL WEARING COURSE Page 12-2
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

and disposed off.

The material shall be scarified and the moisture content adjusted by either uniformly
mixing with water or drying out the material such that the moisture content during
compaction is between 95% and 100% of the Optimum Moisture Content (IS: 2720
Part 8). It shall be graded and trimmed to final line and level. Light compaction may
be applied before the final trim is carried out, but once 25% of the compactive effort
has been applied no further trimming or correction of surface irregularities shall be
allowed.
All rolling shall be longitudinal and shall commence at the outer edges of the
pavement and progress towards the center, except that on super elevated curves,
rolling shall progress from the lower to the higher edge. Where laying is carried out
in lanes care must be taken to prevent water entrapment.
The final trim shall be in cut and the Contractor shall ensure that material from the
trim is neither deposited in low areas nor spread across the section but graded clear of
the works. Following the final trim the material shall be compacted to a dry density of
at least 95% of MDD (IS: 2720 Part 8). During the grading, trimming and compaction
of the material the Contractor shall ensure that the surface and/or the material does not
dry out. If so, the Contractor need to apply fog sprays of water or other approved
means sufficient to maintain the surface and/or material within the specified limits of
moisture content.
On completion of compaction, the surface shall be well closed, free from movement
under compaction plant and free from compaction planes, ridges, cracks, loose or
segregated material. If the surface fails to meet the specified requirements, the
Contractor shall take the action set out in the appropriate part of Section 1100 or such
other action as directed by the Engineer.
(6) Setting out and Tolerances
The layer shall be set out and constructed to the appropriate tolerance specified in
Section 1100.
(7) Drainage of Subgrade and Sub base
The subgrade and sub base shall be kept continuously drained and any damage caused
by water accumulating on or running off the surface shall be made good at the
Contractor’s expense.
Water accumulated on any part of the subgrade or sub base, shall be removed and
disposed off. Any material which becomes saturated, or cannot then be compacted to
the required density, shall be replaced as specified at Contractor’s own expense.
(8) Requirement for Granular sub base
The minimum testing frequency for the purpose of process control shall be as given
in Table 5.2
Routine inspection and testing shall be carried out by the Engineer to test the quality

SECTION 1200 SUBBASE, BASE, HARD SHOULDER AND GRAVEL WEARING COURSE Page 12-3
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

of materials and workmanship for compliance with the requirement s of this Section.
Any materials or workmanship that do not comply with the specified requirements
shall be replaced with materials and/or workmanship complying with the specified
requirements or be replaced to comply with the specified requirements.
(9) Measurement
Granular sub base shall be measured in cubic meter by taking cross section at intervals
of 20 meters or as directed by the Engineer in the original position before the work
starts and after its completion and computing the volumes in cubic meters by average
end area method.
(10) Payment
The sub base construction shall be at their respective contract unit rate. In addition to
stated in Clause 112, the contract unit rate shall be also full and the final compensation
for cost of making arrangement for traffic control and other costs required to complete
the work complying with the requirement of Sections 500, 800 and Clause 1201.
1202 CEMENT TREATED SOIL SUB-BASE/BASE
(1) Scope
This work shall consist of laying and compacting a sub-base/base course of soil treated
with cement on prepared subgrade/sub-base, in accordance with the requirements of
these Specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades and cross-sections shown
on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
(2) Materials
(i) Material to be Treated:
The material used for cement treatment shall be soil including sand and gravel,
laterite, kankar, brick aggregate, crushed rock or slag or any combination of
these. For use in a sub-base course, the material shall have a grading shown in
Table 12.3; it shall have a uniformity coefficient not less than 5, capable of
producing a well closed surface finish. For use in a base course, the material
shall be sufficiently well graded to ensure a well-closed surface finish and have
a grading within the range given in Table 12.3. If the material passing 425
micron sieve is plastic, it shall have a liquid limit not grater than 45 per cent and
plasticity index not grater than 20 percent determined in accordance with IS :
2720 (Part 5). The physical requirements for the material to be treated with
cement for use in a base course shall be same as for Grading I Granular Sub-
base, Clause 1201.
(ii) Cement:
Cement for cement stabilization shall comply with the requirements of IS : 269,
455 and 1489.

SECTION 1200 SUBBASE, BASE, HARD SHOULDER AND GRAVEL WEARING COURSE Page 12-4
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Table 12.3. Grading limits of Material for Stabilisation with Cement

Sieve size Percentage by mass passing

Base / sub base
53.0 mm 100
37.5 mm 95-100
19.0 mm 45-100
9.5 mm 35-100
4.75 mm 25-100
600 micron 8-65
300 micron 5-40
75 micron 0-10

(iii) Lime:
Lime shall have purity of > 70 % by weight of quick lime (CaO) when tested in
accordance with IS 1514.
If needed for pre-treatment of highly clayey soils shall apply.

(iv) Quantity of cement in stabilised mix:

The quantity of cement to be added as per cent by weight of the dry soil shall be
specified in the Contract. Also if lime is used as pretreatment for highly clayey
soils, the quantity as percent by weight of dry soil shall be specified in the
Contract. The mix design shall be done on the basis of 7-day unconfined
compressive strength (UCS) and/or durability test under 12 cycles of wet-dry
conditions. The laboratory strength values shall be at least 1.5 times the
minimum field UCS value stipulated in the Contract.
(v) Water
The water to be used for the cement stabilisation shall be clean and free from
injurious substances. Potable water shall be preferred.
(3) Construction Operations
i) Weather limitations: Stabilisation shall not be done when the air temperature
in the shade is less than 10o C.
ii) Degree of pulverisation: For stabilisation, the soil before addition of stabilizer,
shall be pulverised where necessary, to the extent that it passes the requirements
as set out in Table 12.4.

Table 12.4. Soil Pulverisation requirements for Cement stabilisation

IS Sieve designation Minimum per cent
by weight passing the IS sieve
26.5 mm 100

5.6 mm 80

iii) Equipment for Construction: Stabilised soil sub-bases shall be constructed by

mix-in-place method of construction or as otherwise approved by the Engineer.

SECTION 1200 SUBBASE, BASE, HARD SHOULDER AND GRAVEL WEARING COURSE Page 12-5
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Manual mixing shall be permitted only where the width of laying is not adequate
for mechanical operations, as in small-sized jobs.
The equipment used for mix-in-place construction shall be a rotavator or similar
approved equipment capable of pulverising and mixing the soil with additive and
water to specified degree to the full thickness of the layer being processed, and
of achieving the desired degree of mixing and uniformity of the stabilised
material. If so desired by the Engineer, trial runs with the equipment shall be
carried out to establish its suitability for work.
The thickness of any layer to be stabilised shall be not less than 100 mm when
compacted. The maximum thickness shall be 200 mm, provided the plant used
is accepted by the Engineer.
iv) Mix-in-place method of construction: Before deploying the equipment, the soil
after it is made free of undesirable vegetation or other deleterious matter shall be
spread uniformly on the prepared subgrade in a quantity sufficient to achieve the
desired compacted thickness of the stabilised layer. Where single-pass
equipment is to be employed, the soil shall be lightly rolled at the discretion of
the Engineer.
The equipment used shall either be of single-pass or multiple pass type. The
mixers shall be equipped with an appropriate device for controlling the depth of
processing and the mixing blades shall be maintained or reset periodically so that
the correct depth of mixing is obtained as all times.
With single-pass equipment the forward speed of the machine shall be so
selected in relation to the rotor speed that the required degree of mixing,
pulverisation and depth of processing is obtained. In multiple-pass processing,
the prepared subgrade shall be pulverised to the required depth with successive
passes of the equipment and the moisture content adjusted to be within
prescribed limits mentioned hereinafter. The blending or stabilising material
shall then be spread uniformly and mixing continued with successive passes until
the required depth and uniformity of processing have been obtained.
The mixing equipment shall be so set that it cuts slightly into the edge of the
adjoining lane processed previously so as to ensure that all the material forming
a layer has been properly processed for the full width.
v) Construction with manual means: Where manual mixing is permitted, the soil
from borrow areas shall first be freed of all vegetation and other deleterious
matter and placed on the prepared subgrade. The soil shall then be pulverised by
means of crow-bars, pick axes or other means approved by the Engineer.
Water in requisite quantities may be sprinkled on the soil for aiding
pulverisation. On the pulverised soil, the blending material(s) in requisite
quantities shall be spread uniformly and mixed thoroughly by working with
spades or other similar implements till the whole mass is uniform. After
adjusting the moisture content to be within the limits mentioned later, the mixed

SECTION 1200 SUBBASE, BASE, HARD SHOULDER AND GRAVEL WEARING COURSE Page 12-6
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

material shall be levelled up to required thickness so that it is ready to be rolled.

vi) Moisture content for compaction: The moisture content at compaction checked vide
IS: 2720 (Part 2) shall not be less than the optimum moisture content corresponding
to IS: 2720 (Part 8) nor more than 2 percent above it.
vii) Rolling: Immediately after spreading, grading and levelling of the mixed
material, compaction shall be carried out with approved equipment preceded by
a few passes of lighter rollers if necessary. Rolling shall commence at edges and
progress towards the centre, except at superelevated portions where it shall
commence at the inner edge and progress towards outer edge.
During rolling the surface shall be frequently checked for grade and crossfall
(camber) and any irregularities corrected by loosening the material and
removing/adding fresh material. Compaction shall continue until the density
achieved is at least 98 per cent of the maximum dry density for the material
determined in accordance with IS : 2720 (Part 8).
Care shall be taken to see that the compaction of cement stabilised material
is completed within two hours of its mixing or such shorter period as may be
found necessary in dry weather.
viii) Curing: The sub-base/base course shall be suitably cured for 7 days. Subsequent
pavement course shall be laid soon after to prevent the surface from drying out
and becoming friable. No traffic of any kind shall ply over the completed sub-
base unless permitted by the Engineer.
(4) Surface Finish and Quality Control of Works
The surface finish of construction shall conform to the requirements of section 1100.

(5) Quality control

Cement treated soil sub-base/base shall be tested for the unconfined compressive
strength (UCS) value at 7 days, actually obtained in situ. In case of variation from the
design UCS, in situ value being on lower side, prior to proceeding with laying of
base/surface course on it, the pavement design shall be reviewed for actual UCS value.
The extra pavement thickness needed on account of lower UCS shall be constructed
by the Contractor at his own cost.
(6) Measurements
Stabiliser soil sub-base/base shall be measured as finished work in position in cubic
metres.

(7) Payment
The cement treated soil sub-base/base construction shall be at their respective contract
unit rate. In addition to stated in Clause 112, the contract unit rate shall be also full
and the final compensation for cost of making arrangement for traffic control and other
costs required to complete the work complying with the requirement of Sections 500,
800 and Clause 1202

SECTION 1200 SUBBASE, BASE, HARD SHOULDER AND GRAVEL WEARING COURSE Page 12-7
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

1203 WATER BOUND MACADAM BASE AND SUB-BASE

(1) Scope
This work shall consist of clean, crushed aggregates mechanically interlocked by
rolling and bonded together with screening binding material and water laid on a
properly prepared subgrade/subbase/base or existing pavement, as the case may be
and finished in accordance with the requirements of this specification and in close
conformity with the lines, grades, cross Sections and thickness as per approved plans
or as directed by the Engineer.
Grading to be adopted for a project shall be as specified in the Contract
(2) Sources of Materials
The Contractor shall be responsible for locating and developing suitable sources of
material for water bound macadam. Such sources shall be termed quarries or borrows.
The opening up of quarries/borrows and the construction and maintenance of access
roads shall be carried out in accordance with Section 800.
(3) Material Requirements
(a) Coarse Aggregates
Coarse aggregates shall be either crushed or broken stone, crushed slag. The
aggregates shall conform to the physical requirements set forth in Table 12.5.
Table 12.5: Physical Requirements of Coarse Aggregates for Water Bound
Macadam for Sub base / Base course
Test Requirements Requirements Test
(Base) Sub base method
1 Loss Angeles Abrasion 40 max 45 IS: 2386 -4
Value (LAA)
Or
Aggregate Impact 30 max 40 max IS: 2386-4
Value ( AIV) or IS:
5640**
2 Combined Flakiness and 35 max 35 max IS: 2386 -1
Elongation index **

Note:
1. **Aggregates which get softened in presence of water shall be tested for
Impact value under wet condition as per IS: 5640
2. ***The requirement of flakiness index and elongation index shall be enforced
only in the case of crushed broken stone and crushed slag.
The crushed or broken stone shall be hard, durable and free from excess flat,
elongated, soft and disintegrated, dirt and other deleterious material.
After processing, placing and compaction in the place the grading of the material
shall be a smooth curve within and approximately parallel to one of the envelopes
defined in Table 12.6.

SECTION 1200 SUBBASE, BASE, HARD SHOULDER AND GRAVEL WEARING COURSE Page 12-8
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Table 12.6: Grading Envelope of Coarse Aggregates

Percentage passing by weight

Sieve Size
(mm)
Grading 1 Grading 2
(63-45 mm) ( 53-22.4 mm)
75.0 100 -
63.0 90-100 100
53.0 25-75 95-100
45.0 0-15 65-90
22.4 0-5- 0-10
11.2 - 0-5

(b) Screening
Screening to fill voids in the coarse aggregate shall generally consist of the same
material as of the coarse aggregate. However, where permitted predominantly non-
plastic material like crushed rock fines or natural angular pit sand may be used for this
purpose.
Screening shall conform to the grading set forth in Table 12.7

Table 12.7: Grading Requirements for Screenings

Percent passing by Weight

Sieve Size (mm)

Grading 1 Grading 2
(13.2 mm) ( 11.2mm)

13.2 100
11.2 95-100 100
9.50 80-100
5.6 15-35 50-70
0.18 0-10 5-25

(c) Binding material

Binding material to be used for water bound macadam as a filter material meant for
preventing ravelling, shall comprise of a suitable material approved by the Engineer
having a Plasticity Index (PI) value of less than 6 as determined in accordance with IS
: 2720 (Part-5).
The quantity of binding material where it is to be used, will depend on the type of
screenings. Generally, the quantity required for 75 mm compacted thickness of water
bound macadam will be 0.06-0.09 m3/10m2 ( The quantities should be taken as a
guide only, for estimation of quantities for construction etc., Application of binding
materials may not be necessary when the screenings used are of crushable type such
as moorum or gravel)

SECTION 1200 SUBBASE, BASE, HARD SHOULDER AND GRAVEL WEARING COURSE Page 12-9
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

(4) Compaction Trials

The Contractor shall carry out trials in accordance with Sub-clause 1201 (4).
(5) Construction Operations
(a) Preparation of Base
The surface of the sub-grade/sub-base/base to receive the water bound macadam
course shall be prepared to the specified lines and cross fall and made free of dust and
other extraneous material. Any ruts or soft yielding places shall be corrected in an
approved manner and rolled if necessary by sprinkling water until firm surface in
obtained.
As far as possible, laying water bound macadam course over an existing thick,
bituminous layer may be avoided since it shall cause problems of internal drainage of
the pavement at the interface of two courses. It is desirable to completely pick out the
existing thin bituminous wearing course where water bound macadam is proposed to
be laid over it. However, in exceptional cases, where the intensity of rain is low and
the interface drainage facility is efficient, water bound macadam can be laid over the
existing thin bituminous surface by cutting 50 mm x 50 mm furrows at an angle of 45
degrees to the center line of the pavement at one meter intervals in the existing road.
The directions and depth of furrows shall be such that they provide adequate bondage
and also serve to drain water to the existing granular base coarse beneath the existing
thin bituminous surface.
(b) Inverted Choke
If water bound macadam is to be directly over the sub-grade, without any other
intervening pavement course, a 25 mm thick screenings or coarse sand shall be spread
on the prepared subgrade before application of the coarse aggregates is taken up.
(c) Spreading Coarse Aggregates
The coarse aggregates shall be spread uniformly and evenly upon the prepared
subgrade/sub base/base to proper profile by using templates placed across the road
about 6 m apart, in such quantities that the thickness of each compacted layer is not
more than twice the maximum size of the aggregate. Whenever possible, approved
mechanical devices shall be used spread the aggregates uniformly so as to minimize
the need for manual rectification afterwards. Aggregates placed at locations which are
inaccessible to the spreading equipment, may be spread in one or more layers by any
approved means so as to achieve the specified results.
The spreading shall be done from stockpiles along the side of the roadway or directly
from vehicles. In no case the aggregates shall be dumped in heaps directly on the
surface prepared to receive the aggregate nor shall hauling over uncompact or partially
compacted base be permitted. No segregation of coarse or fine aggregates shall be
allowed and the coarse aggregate as spread shall be of uniform gradation with no
pockets of fine material.
The surface of the aggregates spread shall be carefully checked with templates and all

SECTION 1200 SUBBASE, BASE, HARD SHOULDER AND GRAVEL WEARING COURSE Page 12-10
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

high or low spots shall be removing or adding aggregate as required. The surface shall
be checked frequently with a straight edge while spreading and rolling so as to ensure
a finished surface as per approved plan.
(d) Rolling
Immediately following the spreading of the coarse aggregate, rolling shall be started
with three wheeled power rollers of 8 to 10 ton capacity or tandem or vibratory rollers
of approved type. The type of roller to be used shall be approved by the Engineer
based on trial run.
Except on super elevated portions where the rolling shall proceed from inner edge to
the outer rolling shall begin from the edges gradually progressing towards the center.
First the edge/edges shall be compacted with roller running forward and backward.
The roller shall then move inwards parallel to the centerline of the road, in successive
passes uniformly lapping preceding tracks by at least one half width of wheel of the
roller.
Rolling shall be discontinued when the aggregates are partially compacted with
sufficient void space in them to permit application of screenings. During rolling, slight
sprinkling of water may be done, if necessary. Rolling shall not be done when the
subgrade is soft or yielding or when it causes a wave-like motion in the subgrade or
subbase course.
The rolled surface shall be checked transversely and longitudinally, with templates
and any irregularities corrected by loosening the surface, adding or removing
necessary amount of aggregates and re-rolling until the entire surface conforms to
desired cross fall and grade. In no case shall the use of screenings be permitted to make
up depressions.
Material which have been crushed excessively during compaction or have become
segregated shall be replaced with aggregates of the same or better quality.
(e) Application of Screenings
After the coarse aggregate has been rolled as above screenings shall be applied
gradually over the surface to completely fill the interstices. These shall not be damp
or wet at the time of application. Dry rolling shall be done while the screenings are
being spread so that vibrations of the roller cause them to settle into the voids of the
coarse aggregate. The screenings shall not be dumped in piles but be spread uniformly
in successive thin layers either by the spreading motions of hand shovels or by
mechanical spreaders, or directly from tipper with suitable grit spreading arrangement.
Tipper operating for spreading the screening shall be so driven as not to disturb the
coarse aggregate.
The screenings shall be applied at a slow and uniform rate (in three or more
applications) so as to ensure filling of all voids. This shall be accompanied by dry
rolling and brooming with mechanical brooms, hand-brooms or both. In no case shall
the screenings be applied as fast and thick as to form cakes of ridges on the surface in
such a manner as would prevent filling of voids or prevent the direct bearing of the

SECTION 1200 SUBBASE, BASE, HARD SHOULDER AND GRAVEL WEARING COURSE Page 12-11
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

roller on the coarse aggregate. These operations shall continue until no more screening
can be forced into the voids of the coarse aggregate.
The spreading, rolling, and brooming of screening shall be carried out in only such
lengths of the road which could be completed within one day’s operation.
(f) Sprinkling of Water and Grouting
After the screening have been applied, the surface shall be copiously sprinkled with
water, swept and rolled. Hand brooms shall be used to sweep the wet screenings into
voids and to distribute them evenly. The sprinkling, sweeping and rolling operation
shall be continued, with additional screenings applied as necessary until the coarse
aggregate has been thoroughly keyed, well-bonded and firmly set in its full depth and
a grout has been formed of screenings. Care shall be taken to see that the base or
subgrade does not get damaged due to the addition of excessive quantities of water
during construction.
In case of lime treated soil sub-base, construction of water bound macadam on
top of it shall be taken up after curing of sub as directed by the Engineer.
(g) Application of binding material:
After the application of screenings in accordance with above (e) and (f). the binding
material where it is required to be used shall be as per Clause 1203(c) successively in
two or more thin layers at a slow and uniform rate. After each application, the surface
shall be copiously sprinkled with water, the resulting slurry swept in with hand
brooms, or mechanical brooms to fill the voids properly, and rolled during which water
shall be applied to the wheels of the rollers if necessary to wash down the binding
material sticking to them. These operations shall continue until the resulting slurry
after filling of voids, forms a wave ahead of the wheels of the moving roller.
(h) Setting and Drying
After the final compaction of water bound macadam course the pavement shall be
allowed to dry overnight. Next morning hungry spots shall be filled with screenings
or binding material as directed, lightly sprinkled with water if necessary and rolled.
No traffic shall be allowed on the road until the macadam has set. The Engineer shall
have the discretion to stop hauling traffic from using the completed water bound
macadam course, if in his opinion it would cause excessive damage to the surface.
The compacted water bound macadam course shall be allowed to completely dry and
set before the next pavement course is laid over it.
(6) Setting out and Tolerances
Water bound macadam base and subbase shall be set out and constructed within the
tolerances given in Section 1100.
(7) Quality control
The minimum testing frequency for process control shall be as per Table 5.2 and
construction tolerance shall be as specified in Section 1100.

SECTION 1200 SUBBASE, BASE, HARD SHOULDER AND GRAVEL WEARING COURSE Page 12-12
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Routine inspection and testing shall be carried out by the Engineer to test the quality
of materials and workmanship for compliance with the requirements of this Section.
Any materials or workmanship that do not comply with the specified requirements
shall be replaced by materials and workmanship complying with the specified
requirements, or be repaired so that after being repaired it shall comply with the
specified requirements.
(8) Reconstruction of defective macadam:
The finished surface of water bound macadam shall conform to the tolerance of
surface regularity as prescribed in Section 1100. However, where the surface
irregularity of the course exceeds the tolerances or where the course is otherwise
defective due to subgrade soil mixing with the aggregates, the course to its full
thickness shall be scarified over the affected area, reshaped with added material or
removed and replaced with fresh material as applicable and re-compacted. In no case
shall depressions be filled up with screening or binding material.
(9) Measurement
Water bound macadam subbase/base shall be measured in cubic meter by taking cross
sections at intervals of 20 meters or as directed by the Engineer in the original position
before the work starts and after its completion and computing the volumes in cubic
meters by average and area method.
(10) Payment
Water bound macadam subbase/base shall be paid at their respective contract unit rate.
In addition to state in Clause 112, the contract unit rate shall be also the full and the
final compensation for cost of making arrangement for traffic control and other costs
required to complete the work complying with the requirement of Sections 500, 800
and Clause 1203.

1204 CRUSHER-RUN MACADAM FOR BASE AND SUBBASE

(1) Scope
This work shall consist of furnishing, placing and compacting crushed stone
aggregate sub-base and base courses constructed in accordance with the requirements
set forth in this Specification and in conformity with the lines, grades, thickness and
cross-sections shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.
(2) Materials
The material to be used for the work crushed rock. If crushed gravel/shingle is used,
not less than 90 percent by weight of the gravel/ shingle pieces retained on 4.75 mm
sieve shall have at least two fractured faces. It shall be from any organic matter and
other deleterious substances and shall be of such nature that it can be compacted
readily under watering and rolling to form a firm , stable base. The aggregates shall
confirm to the grading and quality requirements given in Tables 12. 8 and 12.9
The grading to be adopted shall be as indicated in the Contract

SECTION 1200 SUBBASE, BASE, HARD SHOULDER AND GRAVEL WEARING COURSE Page 12-13
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Table12.8: Aggregate Grading Requirements

Sieve size Percentage Passing by weight

53 mm nominal size 37.5 mm nominal size

63 mm 100
45 mm 87 – 100 100
22.4 mm 50-85 90 – 100
5.6 mm 25 – 45 35 – 55
0.71 mm 10 – 25 10 – 30
0.09 mm 2- 5 2-5

Table12.9: Physical requirement s of Coarse Aggregates for Crusher run material

Base

Test Test method Requirements

Loss Angeles Abrasion Value(LAA) IS: 2386 -4 40 max

1 Or
Aggregate Impact Value ( AIV) 30 max
Combined Flakiness and Elongation IS: 2386 -1 35 max
2
index
3 Water Absorption IS: 1386 -3 2 % max
Liquid limit of material passing 425 IS: 2720- 5 25 max
4
micron
Plasticity index of material passing IS: 2720- 5 6 max
5
425 micron
Note:
1. If the water absorption is more than 2 % , soundness test shall be carried out as per
IS: 2386 -5
2. To determine combined portion, the flaky stone from a representative sample
should first be separated out. Flakiness index is weight of flaky stone metal divided
by weight of stone sample. Only the elongated particle s be separated out from the
remaining (non flaky) stone metal. Elongation index is weight of elongated
particles divided by total non flaky particles. The value of flakiness index and
elongation index so found are added up.
(3) Construction Operations
(i) Preparation of sub-grade
The surface of sub-grade shall be prepared in accordance with procedure mention in
water bound macadam. Any ruts, deformations or soft yielding places which occur in
the sub-base or sub-grade shall be corrected and compacted to the required density
before the aggregate base course is placed thereon.

SECTION 1200 SUBBASE, BASE, HARD SHOULDER AND GRAVEL WEARING COURSE Page 12-14
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

(ii) Spreading, Watering, Mixing and Compaction

The aggregate shall be uniformly deposited on the approved sub-base by means of
hauling vehicle with or without spreading devices. . Aggregate will be distributed
over the surface to the depth specified on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
After the base course material has been deposited, it shall be thoroughly blade- mixed
to full depth of the layer by alternately blading the entire layer to the centre and back
to the edges of the road. It shall then be spread and finished to the required cross
section by means of a motor grader.
Water shall be applied prior to and during all blading and processing operations to
moisten the material sufficiently to prevent segregation of the fine and coarse particles.
Water shall be applied sufficient amounts during construction to assist compaction.
Compaction shall commence immediately after to placement of the base. If the
thickness of single compacted layer does not exceed 100 mm, a smooth wheel roller
of 80 to 100 kN weight may be used. For a compacted single layer up to 200 mm the
compaction shall be done with the help of vibratory roller of minimum static weight
of 80 to 100 kN or equivalent capacity. The speed of the roller shall not exceed 5
km/h. Each layer of material shall be compacted to not less than 98 per cent of the
maximum density as determined by IS: 2720 (Part - 8).
(4) Surface Finish and Quality Control of Work
The surface finish of construction shall conform to the requirements of section 1100.
Control on the quality of materials and works shall be exercised by the Engineer in
accordance with Section 500.
(5) Measurement
Crusher-run macadam base shall be measured in cubic meter by taking cross Sections
at intervals of 20 meters or as directed by the Engineer in the original position before
the work starts and after its completion and computing the volumes in cubic meters by
average end area method.
(6) Payment
The Crusher-run macadam base construction shall be paid at their respective contract
unit rate. In addition to stated in Clause 112, the contract unit rate shall be also the full
and the final compensation for cost of making arrangement for traffic control and other
costs required to complete the work complying with the requirement of Section 500,
800 and Clause 1204.
1205 SHOULDER ISLANDS AND MEDIAN
(1) Scope
The work shall consist of constructing shoulder (hard/paved/earthen with brick or
stone block edging) on either side of the pavement, median in the road dividing the
carriageway into separate lanes and islands for channelising the traffic at junctions in
accordance with the requirements of these Specifications and in conformity with the

SECTION 1200 SUBBASE, BASE, HARD SHOULDER AND GRAVEL WEARING COURSE Page 12-15
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

lines, grades and cross-sections shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
(2) Material
Shoulder on either side of the road may be of selected earth/granular material/ paved
conforming to the requirements of Clause 909/1201 and median may be of selected
earth conforming to the requirements of Clause 909.
Median/Traffic islands shall be raised and kerbed at the perimeter and the enclosed
area filled with earth and suitably covered with grass turf/shrubs or paved as per
corresponding Section of specification .
Paved shoulders shall consist of sub-base, base and surfacing courses, as shown in the
drawings and materials for the same shall conform to relevant Specifications of the
corresponding items. Where paved or hard shoulders are not provided, the pavement
shall be provided with brick/stone block edgings as shown in the drawings.
Material for construction of shoulders shall be as shown on the Drawing or instructed
by the Engineer. It may consist of and include:
(a) Gravel wearing course or natural material in accordance with Clauses 1205 /
1201.
(b) Wet mix macadam in accordance with Clause 1208
(c) A single bituminous surface treatment (SBST) in accordance with Clause 1303.
(d) A sand surfacing in accordance with Clause 1305.
(3) Construction of Shoulders
Shoulder shall be constructed concurrently with construction of the adjacent pavement
layers and with the same materials, except in case the base course is bituminous mix,
the “upper shoulder” shall be constructed subsequent to the base course. Shoulders
shall not be constructed ahead of adjacent pavement layers and the Contractor shall
ensure that the method of construction is such that at no time water gets prevented
form draining off the pavement layers. The method of laying and compacting shoulder
material and the compaction requirements shall be in accordance with the relevant
Sub-clauses of 1201, 1204 and 1208.
(4) Setting out and Tolerances
Shoulders shall be set out and constructed to the tolerances given in Section 1100.
(5) Surface Treatment of Shoulders
Surface treatment of shoulders shall be as shown on the Drawing or instructed by the
Engineer. Material for Bituminous surface treatment shall be in accordance with Sub-
clause 1204 (2) and the method of construction shall be in accordance with the relevant
Clause of Section 1300.
Where topsoil and grassing is shown on the Drawing or instructed by the Engineer, 50
mm of humus or topsoil shall be spread on the completed shoulder and lightly rolled.
Grass seeds shall be planted in accordance with the relevant Clauses of Section 2800

SECTION 1200 SUBBASE, BASE, HARD SHOULDER AND GRAVEL WEARING COURSE Page 12-16
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

and kept watered until growth is established. Top soiling and grassing shall be in
accordance with relevant Clause of Section 2800.
(6) Measurement and Payment
Where shoulders are constructed with the same material as the adjacent pavement
layers no separate items shall be included in the Bill of Quantities for shoulder
construction and the measurement and payment shall be in accordance with the
relevant Clause of Section 1200.
Where shoulder construction differs from that of adjacent pavement layers the method
of measurement and payment shall be in accordance with the relevant Clause relating
to the type of material shown on the Drawing or instructed by the Engineer for
shoulder construction.
Bituminous surfacing shall be measured and paid in accordance with relevant Clause
of Section 1300. Top soiling and grassing shall be measured and paid in accordance
with relevant Clauses of Section 200 and 2800.

1206 TELFORD BASE (BLOCK PITCHING)

(1) Block pitching shall consist of clean hard durable single size stones of size equivalent
to the thickness of the base course, but not less than 150 mm nor more than 300 mm
in their longest dimension.
(2) A layer of sand or quarry dust shall first be laid over the base to a thickness of 75 mm.
The block pitching shall then be laid with the longest dimension of each stone in the
vertical direction and breaking joint with adjoining stones. The highest points of
protruding stones shall then be broken off with a knapping hammer and the interstices
filled with spalls. The whole shall then be rolled with a smooth wheeled roller of not
less than 8 tons capacity. Spalls shall be continuously added to the interstices during
rolling until the whole remains immovable under the roller and has a uniform surface
without high or low spots.
(3) Measurement
Telford base shall be measured in cubic meter by taking cross sections at intervals of
20 meters or as directed by the Engineer in the original position before the work starts
and after its completion and computing the volumes in cubic meters by average end
area method.
(4) Payment
The Telford base construction shall be paid at their respective contract unit rates. In
addition to as stated in Clause 112, the contract unit rate shall be also the full and the
final compensation for cost of making arrangement for traffic control and other costs
required to complete the work complying with the requirement of Section 500, 800
and Clause 1206.

SECTION 1200 SUBBASE, BASE, HARD SHOULDER AND GRAVEL WEARING COURSE Page 12-17
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

1207 DRY BOUND MACADAM BASE AND SUB-BASE

(1) Scope
This work shall consist of clean, crushed or broken aggregates mechanically
interlocked by compacting rolling and bonded together with screening binding
material in dry condition and laid on a properly prepared subgrade/subbase/base or
existing pavement, as the case may be and finished in accordance with the
requirements of this specification and in close conformity with the lines, grades, cross
sections and thickness as per approved plans or as directed by the Engineer.
(2) Source of Material
The Contractor shall be responsible for locating and developing suitable sources of
material for dry bound macadam. Such sources shall be termed quarries or borrows.
The opening up of quarries/borrow and the construction and maintenance of access
roads shall be carried out in accordance with Section 800.
(3) Materials Requirements
(a) Coarse Aggregates
Coarse aggregate shall conform to the requirements of Clause 1203 (3) (a).
(b) Screenings
Screenings to fill voids in the coarse aggregate shall generally consist of the same
material as of the coarse aggregate. However, where permitted predominantly non-
plastic material like crushed rock fines or natural angular pit sand may be used for this
purpose.
Screenings shall conform to the grading set forth in Table 12.10

Table 12.10: Grading Requirements for Screenings

Sieve Size (mm) Percent passing by Weight

9.50 100
4.75 95-100
2.80 65-95
0.71 30-65
0.30 15-30
0.075 0-15

(4) Compaction Trials

The Contractor shall carry out trials in accordance with Sub-Clause 1201 (4).
(5) Construction Operations
(a) Preparation of Base
The surface of the sub-grade/sub-base/base to receive the dry bound macadam course
shall be prepared to the specified lines and cross fall and made free of dust and other
extraneous material. any ruts or soft yielding places shall be corrected in an approved

SECTION 1200 SUBBASE, BASE, HARD SHOULDER AND GRAVEL WEARING COURSE Page 12-18
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

manner and rolled if necessary until firm surface is obtained.

As far as possible, laying dry bound macadam course over an existing thick,
bituminous layer may be avoided since it shall cause problems of internal drainage of
the pavement at the interface of the two courses. It is desirable to completely pick out
the existing thin bituminous wearing course where dry bound macadam is proposed to
be laid over it. However, in exceptional cases, where the intensity of rain is low and
the interface drainage facility is efficient, dry bound macadam can be laid over the
existing thin bituminous surface by cutting 50 mm x 50 mm furrows at an angle of 45
degrees to the center line of the pavement at one meter intervals in the existing road.
The directions and depth of furrows shall be such that they provide adequate bondage
and also serve to drain water to the existing granular base coarse beneath the existing
thin bituminous surface.
(b) Inverted Choke
If dry bound macadam is to be laid directly over the sub-grade, without any other
intervening pavement course, a 25 mm thick screenings or coarse sand shall be spread
on the prepared subgrade before application of the coarse aggregate is taken up.
(c) Spreading Coarse Aggregates
The coarse aggregate shall be spread uniformly and evenly upon the prepared
subgrade/subbase/base to proper profile by using templates placed across the road
about 6 m apart, in such quantities that the thickness of each compacted layer is not
more than twice the maximum size of the aggregate. Wherever possible, approved
mechanical devices shall be used to spread the aggregates uniformly so as to minimize
the need for manual rectification afterwards. Aggregates placed at locations which are
inaccessible to the spreading equipment, may be spread in one or more layers by any
approved means so as to achieve the specified results.
The spreading shall be done from stockpiles along the side of the roadway or directly
form vehicles. In no cases the aggregates shall be dumped in heaps directly on the
surface prepared to receive the aggregates nor shall hauling over uncompact or
partially compacted base be permitted. No segregation of coarse or fine aggregate
shall be allowed and the coarse aggregate as spread shall be of uniform gradation with
no pockets of fine material.
The surface of the aggregate spread shall be carefully checked with templates and all
high or low spots shall be remedied by removing or adding aggregates as required.
The surface shall be checked frequently with a straight edge while spreading and
rolling so as to ensure a finished surface as per approved plan.
(d) Rolling
Immediately following the spreading of the coarse aggregate, rolling shall be started
with three wheeled power rollers of 8 to 10 ton capacity or tandem or vibratory rollers
of approved type. The type of roller to be used shall be approved by the Engineer based
on trial run.

SECTION 1200 SUBBASE, BASE, HARD SHOULDER AND GRAVEL WEARING COURSE Page 12-19
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Except on super elevated portions where the rolling shall proceed from inner edge to
the outer, rolling shall begin from the edges gradually progressing towards the center.
First the edge/edges shall be compacted with roller running forward and backward.
The roller shall then move inward parallel to the centerline of the road, in successive
passes uniformly lapping preceding tracks by at least one half width of wheel of the
roller.
Rolling shall be discontinued when the aggregate are partially compacted with
sufficient void space in them to permit application of screening. Rolling shall not be
done when the subgrade is soft or yielding or when it causes a wave-like motion in the
subgrade or sub base course.
The rolled surface shall be checked transversely and longitudinally, with and any
irregularities corrected by loosening the surface, adding or removing necessary
amount of aggregates and re-rolling until the entire surface conforms to desired cross
fall and grade. In no case shall the use of screenings be permitted to make up
depressions.
Material which have been crushed excessively during compaction or have become
segregated shall be replaced with aggregates of the same or better quality.
(e) Application of Screenings
After the coarse aggregate has been rolled as above screenings shall be applied
gradually over the surface to completely fill the interstices. These shall not be damp
or wet at the time of application. Dry rolling with vibratory roller shall be done while
the screenings are being spread so that vibrations of the roller cause them to settle into
the voids of the coarse aggregate. The screenings shall not be dumped in piles but be
spread uniformly in successive thin layers either by the spreading motions of hand
shovels or by mechanical spreaders, or directly from tipper with suitable grit spreading
arrangement. Tipper operating for spreading the screenings shall be so driven as not
to disturb the coarse aggregate.
The screenings shall be applied at a slow and uniform rate (in three or more
applications) so as to ensure filling of all voids. This shall be accompanied by dry
rolling and brooming with mechanical brooms, hand-brooms or both. In no case shall
the screenings be applied as fast and thick as to form cakes of ridges on the surface in
such a manner as would prevent filling of voids or prevent the direct bearing of the
roller on the coarse aggregate. These operation shall continue until no more screenings
can be forced into voids of the coarse aggregate.
The spreading, rolling, and brooming of screenings shall be carried out in only such
lengths of the road which could be completed within one day’s operations.
The minimum dry densities of the dry bound macadam to be achieved as a percentage
of the specific gravity shall be:
Base : 82% of the specific gravity
Subbase : 80% of the specific gravity

SECTION 1200 SUBBASE, BASE, HARD SHOULDER AND GRAVEL WEARING COURSE Page 12-20
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

(6) Setting out and Tolerances

Dry bound macadam base and subbase shall be set out and constructed within the
tolerances given in Section 1100.
(7) Quality Control
The minimum testing frequency for process control shall be as given in Table 5.2.
Routine inspection and testing shall be carried out by the Engineer to test the quality
of materials and workmanship for compliance with the requirements of this Section.
Any materials or workmanship that do not comply with the specified requirements
shall be replaced by materials and workmanship complying with the specified
requirements, or be repaired so that after being repaired it shall comply with the
specified requirements.
(8) Measurement
Dry bound macadam subbase/base shall be measured in cubic meter by taking cross
section at intervals of 10 meters or as directed by the Engineer in the original position
before the work starts and after its completion and computing the volumes in cubic
meters by average end area method.
(9) Payment
Dry bound macadam construction shall be paid at their respective contract unit rate.
In addition to as stated in Clause 112, the contract unit rate shall be also the full and
the final compensation for cost of making arrangement for traffic control and other
costs required to complete the work complying with the requirement of Section 500,
800 and Clause 1207.
1208 WET MIX MACADAM BASE AND SUBBASE
(1) Scope and Definition
This Clause covers procuring, furnishing and placing of approved crushed graded
aggregate and granular material, premixed with water on top of the complete subgrade
or subbase and constructing a subbase or base, as the case may be, in accordance with
the requirement of this Specification.
“Graded crushed stone” shall mean crushed stone with a smooth grading curve within
a specified envelope. As mention in Table 12.1.The grading to be adopted for a project
shall be as specified in the contract.
(2) Sources of Materials
The Contractor shall be responsible for locating and developing suitable of material.
(3) Material Requirements
The material shall comply with following requirements:
(a) It shall consist of crushed stone, free from clay, organic or other deleterious
matter.

SECTION 1200 SUBBASE, BASE, HARD SHOULDER AND GRAVEL WEARING COURSE Page 12-21
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

(b) It shall comply with the physical requirements defined in Table 12.11.

Table 12.11: Physical Requirement for Materials for Wet mix macadam subbase/
base
Physical Test method Requirement for class Requirement for class III, IV
properties I & II (max %)
(Max %)
Base (B1) Sub base Base (B2) Sub base (S2)
(S1)
Los Angeles
Abrasion value
IS: 2386-4 40 45
(LAA) or
Aggregate
Impact Value
IS: 5640 30 35** 40** 45**
(AIV)
Combined
Flakiness and
Elongation index IS: 2386-1
35
(Total)

* B1, B2, S1 and S2 are classes of materials

** In case of use of Low grade aggregates, Wet Aggregate Impact value (Test method
IS: 5640) should not exceed given range and thickness of pavement layer should
be at least 15 cm.
(c) It shall comply with the Following Grading’s After processing, placing and
compaction in the pavement the grading of the material shall be smooth curve
within and approximately parallel to one of the envelopes defined in Table 12.12.

Table 12.12 Grading Envelopes for Wet mix Macadam

Sieve Size Percentage passing by weight

(mm) Base Subbase

S1* S2*
53.0 100- 100 100
45.0 95-100 75-100 85-100
26.5 42-75 75-95
22.4.0 60-80 25-60 60-87
11.2.0 40-60 15-45 50-80
4.75 25-40 12-37 12-32
2.36 15-30 6-25 7-21
0.60 8-22 5-21 6-17
0.075 0-5 3-12 3-10

*S1and S2 are classes of subbase

(4) Crushing, Screening and Mixing
Unless otherwise instructed, crushing shall be carried out at least in two stages.
The crushing, screening and proportioning of materials and their subsequent mixing

SECTION 1200 SUBBASE, BASE, HARD SHOULDER AND GRAVEL WEARING COURSE Page 12-22
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

shall be carried out using methods machines or Batching plant acceptable to the
Engineer. To avoid segregation, graded crushed stone shall be moistened when being
handled and shall not be stockpiled in heaps higher than 5 m.
If the Contractor wishes to add material from another source in order to achieve the
specified grading the following conditions shall apply:

(a) The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with the provision
and mixing in of the material, including land acquisition.
(b) The material shall be non-plastic, hard and durable as specified. Particles shall
be free from organic materials, clay and other deleterious substances.
(c) Only material passing the 6.3 mm sieve may be added, the percentage to be
added shall be agreed with the Engineer and in any case shall not exceed 15%
by weight of the mixture.
(d) The minimum crushing rations as well as other physical requirements as
specified in Sun-clause 1208 (3) shall be maintained.
(e) The mixed material should be uniformly wet and no segregation should be
permitted
(5) Transporting
The mixed material shall be transported and dumped in such a way that no segregation
occurs.
(6) Compaction Trials
The Contractor shall carry out compaction trials in accordance with Sub-clause 1208
(7) Laying and Compacting
The Contractor shall take appropriate measures to prevent segregation during dumping
and spreading operations.
The graded crushed stone shall be laid by plant capable of distributing the graded
crushed stone in a layer of uniform thickness and without segregation.
The compacted thickness of any layer laid, processed and compacted at one time shall
not exceed 150 mm, and where a greater thickness is required, the graded crushed
stone shall be laid in two or more equal layers.
The compacted thickness of any base layer shall not be less than 3 times the maximum
size of the graded crushed stone and the compacted thickness of any subbase layer
shall not be less than 2 times the maximum size of the graded crushed stone.
As soon as possible after laying, compaction shall be carried out. The moisture
content shall be adjusted as necessary and, during compaction, care shall be taken to
maintain the moisture content evenly at the specified value. Unless otherwise
instructed by the Engineer, the moisture content at the time of compaction shall be
between 95 and 100% of the Optimum Moisture Content determined as per IS: 2720

SECTION 1200 SUBBASE, BASE, HARD SHOULDER AND GRAVEL WEARING COURSE Page 12-23
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Part 8. The appropriate Sections of Sub-clause 1201 (5) shall also be applicable for
this Clause 1208.
All rolling shall be longitudinal and shall commence at the outer edges of the pavement
and progress towards the center, except that on super elevated curves, rolling shall
progress from the lower to the higher edge. Where laying is carried out in lanes care
must be taken to prevent water entrapment.
The minimum dry densities to be achieved as a percentage of the Maximum Dry
Density (MDD) determined in accordance with IS 2720 Part 8 shall be:

Base : 98% of MDD

Subbase : 95% of MDD
On completion of the compaction the surface shall be well closed, mechanically stable,
free from visible movement under compaction plant and free from compaction planes,
ridges, cracks, loose or segregated material. If the surface fails to meet the
requirements of these Specifications, the Contractor shall take the action set out in the
appropriate part of Section 1100 or such other action as directed by the Engineer.
After final compaction of wet mix macadam course, the road shall be allow to dry for
24 hours. No vehicular traffic shall be allowed on the finished wet mix macadam
surface. Construction equipment may be allowed with the approval of the Engineer.
(8) Tolerances
Wet mix Macadam subbase and base shall be set out and constructed to the tolerances
given in Section 1100.
(9) Quality control
The minimum testing frequency for process control shall be as specified in Table 5.2
(10) Routine Inspection and Testing
Routine inspection and testing shall be carried out by the Engineer to test the quality
of materials and workmanship for compliance with the requirements of this Section.
(11) Rectification of Surface irregularity
Where the surface irregularity of the wet mix macadam exceeds the permissible
tolerances or where the course is otherwise defective due to sub-grade soil getting
mixed with the aggregates, the full thickness of the layer shall be scarfied over the
affected area , re-shaped with added premixed material or removed and replaced
with fresh premixed material as as applicable and re-compacted in accordance with
the Clause 1208 (7) The area treated in the aforesaid manner shall not be less than
5 m long and 2 m wide. In no case shall depression be filled up with unmixed and
ungraded material or fines.
(12) Measurement
Wet mix macadam base and sub base shall be measured in cubic meter by taking cross
sections at intervals of 10 meters or as directed by the Engineer in the original position

SECTION 1200 SUBBASE, BASE, HARD SHOULDER AND GRAVEL WEARING COURSE Page 12-24
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

before the work starts and after its completion and computing the volumes in cubic
meters by average end area method.
(13) Payment
The wet mix macadam base and sub base construction shall be paid at their respective
contract unit rate. In addition to stated in Clause 112, the contract unit rate shall be
also the full and the final compensation for cost of making arrangement for traffic
control and other costs required to complete the work complying with the requirement
of Section 500, 800 and Clause 1208.

SECTION 1600 PILING FOR STRUCTURES Page 16-25

SECTION 1800: FLASEWORK, FORMWORK AND SURFACE FINISH

FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES ................................................................... 1

1801 SCOPE AND DEFINITIONS....................................................................................... 1

1802 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................... 1

1803 FALSEWORK ............................................................................................................... 1

1804 FORMWORK FOR CONCRETE............................................................................... 5

1805 SURFACE FINISH ON FORMED SURFACES ....................................................... 8

1806 FINISHES ON UNFORMED SURFACES................................................................. 9

1807 REMEDIAL WORK TO DEFECTIVE SURFACES.............................................. 11

1808 MEASUREMENT ....................................................................................................... 11

1809 PAYMENT ................................................................................................................... 11

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

SECTION 1800: FLASEWORK, FORMWORK AND SURFACE FINISH

FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES
1801 SCOPE AND DEFINITIONS
This Section covers the preparation, construction and removal of false work and formwork
for concrete structures. It also covers the quality requirements for surface finish on formed
and unformed surfaces.
Definitions used in this Clause and other relevant Clause of this Section and other relevant
Sections of these Specifications are as follows:
 Formwork means the surface against which concrete is placed to form a face. All the
immediate support necessary to retain the surface in position while concrete is placed,
shall be treated an integral part of formwork. 


 False work means the structural elements supporting both the formwork and the concrete
until the concrete becomes self-supporting. 


 A formed face is one which has been cast against formwork. 


 An unformed surface means a horizontal or nearly horizontal surface which is not cast
against form work. 


 An exposed face is one which will remain visible when construction has been completed. 

1802 GENERAL
The Contractor shall be responsible for designing and construction false work and formwork
so that they will support the loads imposed on them by the fresh concrete together with
additional stresses imposed by vibrating equipment and by construction traffic, and so that
after the concrete has hardened the formed faces shall be in the positions shown on the
Drawing within the tolerances set out in Clause 1805.
Before construction begins, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer Drawing showing
details of the proposed formwork and false work in accordance with this Section and other
relevant Section of these Specification.
1803 FALSEWORK
(1) Design and Drawing
The design of all false work for structures with span lengths of 6 meters or more and
the design of all false work where traffic openings are specified shall conform to the
requirements of this Clause.
Detailed working drawing in triplicate and design calculations for false work shall be
furnished by the Contractor to the Engineer.
No false work construction shall start until the Engineer has reviewed and approved
the Drawing. The Contractor shall provide sufficient time for the Engineer to complete
this review.
Such time shall be proportionate to the complexity of the false work design and in no

SECTION 1800 FALSEWORK, FORMWORK, AND SURFACE FINISH FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES Page 18-1
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

case shall be less than two weeks. The Contractor may revise the false work drawing
at any time provided sufficient time is allowed for the Engineer’s review and approval,
before construction is started on the revised portion.
(a) False work Drawing
The false work drawing shall include but not limited to the following: -
(i) The traffic openings.
(ii) A superstructure placing diagram, showing proposed concrete placing sequence
and construction joints location.
(iii) Assumed values of soil bearing capacity for both wet and dry conditions, as
determined by the Contractor.
(iv) Anticipated total settlements of false work and forms.
(v) Details of drainage, if any.
(vi) Details of drainage protection (or scouring/undermining protection) of footing
and/or foundations, including locations of existing utilities, excavations, recent
fills if any.
(vii) Details of all elements required to insure the free movements of concrete due to
shrinkage.
(viii) Proposed cambers to compensate deflections, and false adjustments according to
the various stages of the construction and the concrete placing sequence.
(ix) Details of joints, bracing and major arrangements to insure vertical and
horizontal stability in all direction and at all stages of operations.
(x) Manufacture’s recommendations and/or other operating recommendations as
required for the justifications for the design.
When a schedule for placing concrete is shown on the contract plans, no deviation
shall be permitted there from unless approved in writing by the Engineer.
Anticipated total settlement shall not exceed 25 mm. This shall include false work
footing settlement and joints take-up. Deck slab forms between girders shall be
constructed with no allowance for settlement relative to the girders.
(b) False work Calculation
The calculations must show the stresses & deflections of all supporting members. The
design of false work shall be based upon the maximum loads, the maximum stresses
and deflections and the conditions listed below. The stresses listed are based upon the
use of undamaged high quality materials and such stresses shall be reduced by the
Contractor if lesser quality materials are to be used. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the proper evaluation of his false work material and design of false
work to carry safely the actual loads imposed.
(i) The design loads for false work shall consist of the sum of dead and live vertical

SECTION 1800 FALSEWORK, FORMWORK, AND SURFACE FINISH FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES Page 18-2
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

loads and horizontal load.

(ii) The vertical design loads for the combined live and dead loads shall not be less
than the actual required loads with due allowance for dynamic loads. However,
it shall not be less than 0.5 t/m2.
(iii) Dead load shall include the weight of concrete, reinforcing steel, forms and false
work.
(iv) Live load shall consist of the actual weight of the equipment to be supported by
false work, applied as concentrated loads, at the points of contact and a uniform
of and less than 0.1 t/m2 applied over the area supported, plus 0.11t/lm applied
at the outside edges of deck overhangs.
(v) The horizontal loads to be resisted in any direction by diagonal bracing, ties or
other means approved by the Engineer shall not be less than 2 percent of the total
dead load.
(vi) False work footing shall be designed to carry the load imposed upon them
without exceeding the estimated soil bearing capacity and anticipated
settlements.
(vii) If the concrete is to be pre stressed, the false work shall be designed to support
increased or readjusted loads caused by the pre stressing forces.
(viii) Joists supporting slabs and overhangs shall be considered as false work and they
shall be designed for the maximum loading and deflections loading and
deflections permissible on jacks, brackets, columns joist and other manufactures
devices shall not exceed the manufacturer’s recommendations and in all cases
their deflections shall be less than 1/270 of their clear span.
If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish catalogue data listing
the manufacturer’s recommendations for manufactured devices and perform
tests as necessary to demonstrate the adequacy of any such device proposed for
use.
False work designed for pre-stressed concrete shall allow for the required free
movements during pre-stressing operations.
When footing foundations are to be used, the bearing capacity of the soils shall be
determined by the Contractor using the Plate Load Test method. The soil surface must
be prepared adequately to allow for a relevant implementation of this test. Tests shall
be carried out in both dry and wet conditions.
(c) False work over or Adjacent to Roadways
In addition to the minimum requirements specified above, false work over or adjacent
to roadways, where false work opening is specified, shall be designed and constructed
so that the false work will be stable if subjected to impact by vehicles. The false work
design in such cases shall include, but not be limited to the following minimum

SECTION 1800 FALSEWORK, FORMWORK, AND SURFACE FINISH FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES Page 18-3
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

provisions:
(i) The vertical design load of false work bents, including footing and caps which
support the portion of the false work over openings shall be increased to not less
than twice the design load calculated in accordance with Sub-Clause 1803 (1)
(b).
(ii) Each false work post adjacent to openings shall be securely anchored to its
withstand footing or otherwise laterally restrained at its base so as to withstand
a 0.9t force applied at the base of the post in any direction except toward the
road track.
(2) Construction
The false work shall be constructed to substantially conform to the false work
Drawing.
The materials used in the false work construction shall be of the quality necessary to
sustain the stresses required by the false work design.
The workmanship used in false work construction shall be of such quality that the false
work will support the loads imposed on it without excessive settlement to take-up
beyond that shown on the false work Drawing. False work shall be founded on a solid
footing safe against undermining protected under softening, and capable of supporting
the loads imposed on it. When false work is supported on piles, the piles shall be driven
to a bearing value determined in accordance with IS 2911.
When false work is over or adjacent to roadways or waterways, all details of the false
work system which contribute to horizontal stability and resistance to impact shall be
installed at the time each element of the false work is erected and shall remain until
the false work is removed.
Suitable jacks or wedges shall be used in connection with false work to set the forms
at the required grade and to take up excessive settlement in the false work either before
or during the placing of concrete.
Comber strip shall be used as approved by the Engineer, to compensate the false work
deflection, vertical alignment and anticipated structure deflection. The Contractor
shall provide tell-tales attached to the soffit and readable from the ground, in enough
systematically placed locations to determine the total settlement of the entire portion
the structure where the concrete is being placed.
Should unanticipated events occur, including settlements that deviate more than plus
or minus 10 mm from those indicated on the false work Drawing, which in the opinion
of the Engineer would prevent obtaining a structure conforming to the requirements
of this Specification, the placing of concrete shall be discontinued until corrective
measures satisfactory to the Engineer are provide. In the event satisfactory measures
are not provided prior to the initial set of the concrete in the affected area, the placing
of concrete shall be discontinued at a location determined by the Engineer. All
unacceptable concrete shall be removed.

SECTION 1800 FALSEWORK, FORMWORK, AND SURFACE FINISH FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES Page 18-4
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of false work throughout the
construction.
(3) Removal
False work shall not be released before the requirements of Sub-clause 1804 (3) are
fulfilled.
False work for cast-in-situ pre-stressed concrete shall be released according to the pre-
stressing sequences shown on the Drawing.
False work shall be removed uniformly and gradually to permit the structure to take
its load slowly and evenly.
All false work material shall be removed. False work pilling shall be removed up to at
least 600 mm below the surface of the original ground or the bottom or side slope of
excavated areas.
(4) False work for Steel Structures
False work for steel structures shall comply to the requirements of Sub-clause 1803
(1) to 1803 (4) in addition to the requirements of this Sub-clause.
False work and forms shall be constructed so that any loads applied to girder webs
shall be applied within a distance to a flange or stiffener approved by the Engineer and
shall be distributed in a manner that will not produce local distortion of the web.
Temporary struts and ties shall be provided as necessary to resist lateral loads applied
to the girder flanges and prevent appreciable relative vertical movement between the
edge of deck forms and the adjacent steel girder.
1804 FORMWORK FOR CONCRETE
(1) Construction of Formwork
Joints in formwork for exposed faces shall, unless otherwise specified, be evenly
spaced and horizontal or vertical and shall be continuous in a regular pattern.
All joints in formwork shall be water tight. Where reinforcement projects through
formwork, the form shall fit closely round the bars.
Formwork shall be so designed that it may be easily removed from the work without
damage to the faces of the concrete. It shall also incorporate provisions for making
minor adjustments in position, if required, to ensure the correct location of concrete
faces. Due allowance shall be made in the position of all formwork for movement and
settlement under the weight of fresh concrete.

Surfaces at slopes less than 20o may be formed by screeding. Surfaces at slopes
between 20o and 30o shall generally be formed it the Contractor can demonstrate to
the satisfaction of the Engineer that such slopes can be screeded with the use of special
screed boards to hold the concrete in place during vibration.
Horizontal or inclined formwork to the upper surface of concrete shall be adequately

SECTION 1800 FALSEWORK, FORMWORK, AND SURFACE FINISH FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES Page 18-5
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

secured against uplift due to the pressure of fresh concrete. Formwork shall also be
tied down or otherwise secured against floating within the body of the concrete.
The internal and external angles on concrete surfaces shall be formed with fillets and
chamfers of the sizes shown on the Drawing unless otherwise instructed by the
Engineer.
Supports for formwork may be bolted to previous placed concrete provide the type of
bolt used is acceptable to the Engineer. If metal ties through the concrete are used in
conjunction with bolts, the metal left in shall not be close to the face of the concrete
by less than 50 mm.
Formwork shall not be re-used after it has suffered damage which is sufficient to
impair the finished surfaces of the concrete.
Where circumstances prevent easy access within the form, temporary openings shall
be provided through the formwork for cleaning and inspection.
Shear keys of the size and shape as indicated on the Drawing shall be provided in all
construction joints.
Where precast concrete elements are specified for use as permanent formwork, or
proposed by the Contractor and agreed by the Engineer, they shall comply with the
requirements of formwork as specified in the Specification in respect of surface finish,
strength and rigidity. Such elements shall be set true to line and level within the
tolerances prescribed for the appropriate class of finish in Clause 1806 and fixed so
that they cannot move when concrete is placed against them.
(2) Preparation of Formwork
Before any reinforcement is placed into position within formwork, the latter shall be
thoroughly cleaned and then dressed with a release agent. The agent shall be either a
suitable oil incorporating a wetting agent, an emulsion of water suspended in oil or a
low viscosity oil containing chemical agents. The Contractor shall not use an emulsion
of oil suspended in water nor any release agent which causes staining or discoloration
of the concrete, air holes on the concrete surface, or retards the set of the concrete or
affects the strength of concrete.
In order to avoid colour differences on adjacent concrete surfaces, only one type of
release agent shall be used in any one section of the works.
In cases where it is necessary to fix reinforcement before placing formwork, all surface
preparation of formwork shall be carried out before it is placed into position. The
Contractor shall not allow reinforcement or pre-stressing tendons to be contaminated
with formwork release agent.
Before placing concrete all dirt, construction debris and other foreign matter shall be
removed completely from within the placing area.
Before concrete placing commences, all wedges and other adjusting devices shall be
secured against movement during concrete placing and the Contractor shall maintain

SECTION 1800 FALSEWORK, FORMWORK, AND SURFACE FINISH FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES Page 18-6
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

a watch on the formwork during placing to ensure that no movement occurs. If any
movement noticed, the formwork shall be set right immediately.
(3) Removal of Formwork
Formwork shall be carefully removed without shock or disturbance to the concrete.
No formwork shall be removed until the concrete has gained sufficient strength to
withstand any stresses safely to which it may thereby be subjected.
The minimum periods which shall elapse between completion of placing concrete and
removal of forms are given in Table 18-1 and apply to ambient temperatures higher
than 10oC. At lower temperatures or if cement other than ordinary Portland are
involved, the Engineer may instruct longer periods.
Alternatively, formwork may be removed when the concrete has attained the strength
set out in Table 18.1, provided that the attained strength is determined by making test
cubes and curing them under the same conditions as the concrete to which they refer.
Compliance with these requirements shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligation
to delay removal of formwork until the removal can be completed without damage to
the concrete.
If the Contractor wishes to strip formwork from the underside of arches, beams and
slabs before the expiry of the period for supports set out above, it shall be designed so
that it can be removed without disturbing the supports. The Contractor shall not
remove supports temporarily for the purpose of stripping formwork and subsequently
replace them.
As soon as the formwork has been removed, bolt holes in concrete faces other than
construction joints which are not required for subsequent operations shall be
completely filled with mortar sufficiently dry to prevent any slumping at the face. The
mortar shall be mixed in the same proportions as the fine aggregate and cement in the
surrounding concrete and with the same materials and shall be finished flush with the
face of the concrete.
After of the formwork, the date of casting of concrete shall be marked on the surface
of related concrete by water proof paint/marker for estimation of cuffing time.
Table 18.1: Minimum Periods for Formwork Removal
Minimum Strength to
period for be attained
Position of Formwork
Temperatures
over 10o C
Vertical or near vertical faces of mass Concrete 24 hours 0.2 fck
Vertical or near vertical faces of reinforced 48 hours 0.3 fck
Underside of arches beams and slabs (formwork only) 4 days 0.5 fck
Supports to underside of arches, beams and slabs 14 days fck
Arched linings in tunnels and underground works 24 hours 4 N/mm2
Note: fck is the Characteristic Strength for the class of concrete used.

SECTION 1800 FALSEWORK, FORMWORK, AND SURFACE FINISH FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES Page 18-7
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

1805 SURFACE FINISH ON FORMED SURFACES

Class of Finish
The surface finish to be achieved on formed concrete surfaces shall be as shown on the
Drawing and are defined hereunder: -
(1) Class F1 Finish
This finish is for surfaces against which backfill or further concrete will be placed.
Formwork may be sawn boards, sheet metal or any other suitable material which will
prevent the loss of laitance from the concrete being placed.
(2) Class F2 Finish
This finish is for surfaces which are permanently exposed to view but he highest
standard of finish is not required. Forms to provide a Class F2 finish shall be faced
with wrought thicknesses tongued and grooved boards with square edges arranged in
uniform pattern and close jointed or with suitable sheet material. The thickness of
boards or sheets shall be such that there shall be no visible deflection under the
pressure exerted by the concrete placed against them.
Joints between boards or panels shall be horizontal and vertical unless otherwise
directed. In this type of finish pitting, fins surface discoloration and other minor
defects shall be remedied at the time and by methods agreed by the Engineer.
(3) Class F3 Finish
This is for surfaces which will be in contact with water flowing at high velocity, and
for surfaces prominently exposed to view where good appearance is of special
importance. To achieve this finish, which shall be free of board marks, the formwork
shall be faced with plywood or equivalent material in large sheets. The sheets shall be
arranged in an approved uniform pattern. Wherever possible, joints between sheets
shall be arranged to coincide with architectural features or changes in direction of the
surfaces.
All joints between panels shall be vertical and horizontal unless otherwise directed.
Suitable joints shall be provided between sheets to maintain accurate alignment in the
plane of the sheets. Unfaced wrought boarding or standard steel panels will not be
permitted for Class F3 finish. The Contractor shall ensure that the surface is protected
from rust marks, spillages and stains of all kinds.
(4) Curved Surfaces
For curved surfaces where F2 or F3 finishes are called for, the formwork face shall be
built up of splines cut to make a tight surface which shall then be dressed to produce
the required finish.
Alternatively, single curvature surfaces may be faced with plastic or plywood linings
attached to the backing with adhesive or with escutcheon pins driven flush. Linings
shall not bulge, wrinkle or otherwise deform when subjected to temperature and
moisture changes.

SECTION 1800 FALSEWORK, FORMWORK, AND SURFACE FINISH FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES Page 18-8
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

(5) Tolerances
All parts of formed concrete surfaces shall be in the positions shown on the Drawing
within the tolerances set out in Table 18.2.
In cases where the Drawing call for tolerances other than those given in Table 18.2 the
Drawing shall rule.
Where precast units have been set to a specified tolerance, further adjustments shall
be made as necessary to produce a satisfactory straight or curved line. When the
Engineer has approved the alignment, the Contractor shall fix the units so that there is
no possibility of further movement.

Table 18.2: Tolerances

Class of finish Tolerances in mm (See Note)

A B C
F1 10 10 +25 to – 10
F2 5 10 ±15
F3 2 5 ±10

Note: The tolerances A, B and C given in the table are defined as follows:
A Is an abrupt irregularity in the surface due to misaligned formwork or defects in
the face of the formwork?
B Is gradual deviation from a plane surface as indicated by a straight edge 3 m
long? In the case of curved surfaces, the straight edge shall be replaced by a
correctly shaped template.
C Is the amount by which the whole or part of a concrete face is displaced form the
correct positions shown on the Drawing.
1806 FINISHES ON UNFORMED SURFACES
Horizontal or nearly horizontal surfaces which are not cast against formwork shall be
finished to the class shown on the Drawing and defined hereunder.
(1) UF 1 Finish
All surfaces on which no higher class of finish called for on the Drawing or instructed
by the Engineer shall be given a UF 1 finish.
The concrete shall be levelled and screeded to produce a uniform plain or ridged
surface, surplus concrete being struck off by a straight edge immediately after
compaction.
(2) UF 2 Finish
This is a floated finish for roof or floor slabs and other surfaces where a hard trawled
surface is not required.
The surface shall first be treated as a class UF 1 finish and after the concrete has

SECTION 1800 FALSEWORK, FORMWORK, AND SURFACE FINISH FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES Page 18-9
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

hardened sufficiently, it shall be floated by hand or machine sufficient only to produce

a uniform surface free from screed marks.
(3) UF 3 Finish
This is a hard trowel led surface for use where weather resistance or appearance is
important, or which is subject to high velocity water flow.
The surface shall be floated as for a UF 2 finish but to the tolerance stated below in
Sub-clause 1806 (5). When the moisture film has disappeared and the concrete has
hardened sufficiently to prevent laitance from being worked to the surface, it shall be
steel-trowel led under firm pressure to produce a dense, smooth uniform surface free
from trowel marks.
(4) Finishing of Bridge Decks
A smooth riding surface of uniform texture true to the required grade and cross
section, shall be obtained in all bridge roadway decks.
The placing the concrete in bridge roadway decks shall not be permitted until the
Engineer is satisfied that appropriate methods, equipment such as concrete finishers
and experienced operator, are employed to finish the deck, and all necessary finishing
tools and equipment are available on site and in satisfactory conditions for use.
Bridge deck surfaces shall be within the tolerances state below in Sub-clause 1806 (5)
for UF3 finish and comply with the following additional requirements: -
The finished surface of the concrete shall be tested by means of a straightedge 3 m
long and when the surface is not covered by bituminous surfacing or other cover, the
surface of the concrete shall not vary by more than 3 mm measured from the lower
edge of the straightedge.
(5) Tolerances
All parts of unformed concrete surfaces shall be in the positions shown on the
Drawing within the tolerances set out in Table 18.3.
In case where the Drawing call for tolerances other than those given in Table 18.3 the
Drawing shall rule.
Table 18.3: Tolerances
Class of finish Tolerances in mm (See Note)
A B C
UF1 Not applicable 10 +20 to – 10
UF2 Nil 10 +20 or – 10
UF3 Nil 5 +12.5 or – 7.5

Note: The tolerances A, B and C given in the table are defined as follows:
A is the maximum allowable value of any sudden change of level in the surface.
B is the maximum allowable value of any gradual irregularity of the surface, as
indicated by the gap between the surface and a three-meter-long straight edge

SECTION 1800 FALSEWORK, FORMWORK, AND SURFACE FINISH FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES Page 18-10
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

or correctly shaped template place on the surface.

C is the maximum allowable value of the in level or position between a three-
meter-long straightedge or correctly shaped template placed on the surface and
the specified level or position of that surface.
1807 REMEDIAL WORK TO DEFECTIVE SURFACES
If no removal of any formwork the concrete surface is found to be defective in any way,
the Contractor shall make no attempt to remedy such defects prior to the Engineer’s
inspection and the receipt of any instructions which the Engineer may give Defective
surfaces shall not be made good by plastering.
Areas of honey combing which the Engineer agrees, shall be repaired after cutting back to
sound concrete when the concrete is no more than 3 days old. Care shall be taken that
reinforcement and sheathing ducts are not damaged. The cavity shall have sides at right
angles to the face of the concrete. After cleaning out with water and compressed air,
compressed air, a thin layer of cement grout shall be brushed on to the concrete surfaces in
the cavity. It shall then be filled immediately with the concrete of the same class as the main
body. The concrete shall be prepared from the aggregate of maximum size 0.5 times the
depth of the cavity or 20 mm whichever is the smaller. A form provided with a lip to enable
concrete to be placed shall be used against the cavity. The form shall be filled above the top
edge of the cavity.
After seven days the lip of concrete shall be broken off and the surface shall be ground
smooth.
When the concrete is more than three days old, areas of honey combing shall be repaired
using an epoxy bonding agent with a method approved by the Engineer.
Surface irregularities which are outside the limits of tolerance set out in Clause 1806 shall
be ground down in the manner and to the extent instructed by the Engineer.
Blowholes in vertical surfaces shall be filled with laitance, or mortar using fine aggregate
not larger than 0.3 mm, rubbed over the affected area with a rubber face float and finished
with polythene.
Defects other than those mentioned above shall be dealt with as instructed by the Engineer.
1808 MEASUREMENT
Unless stated otherwise the rate for concrete in Plain Concrete or Reinforced Concrete or
Pre-stressed Concrete shall be deemed to include all formwork required in accordance with
this Section and shall not be measured separately.
Where it is specifically stipulated in the Contract that the formwork shall be paid for
separately, measurement of formwork shall be taken in square metres of the surface area of
concrete which is in contact with formwork
1809 PAYMENT
Unless stated otherwise, the unit rate of the Plain Concrete or Reinforced Concrete or Pre-

SECTION 1800 FALSEWORK, FORMWORK, AND SURFACE FINISH FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES Page 18-11
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

stressed Concrete as defined in respective Sections shall be deemed to cover the costs of all
formwork, including cost of all materials, labour, tools and plant required for design,
construction and removal of formwork and supervision as described in this Section
including properly supporting the members until the concrete is cured, set and hardened as
required.
In case of formwork and other false work specifically provided as a separate item, it shall
be paid as per the contract unit rate. In addition to those specified in Clause 112 the rates
for formwork shall include the cost of submission of details, transportation and use of all
materials for formwork and false work, erection including provision of supports, fillets and
chamfers 75 mm and less in width, bolts, ties, fixing, cutting to waste, drilling or notching
the formwork for reinforcement where required, working around pipes, ducts, conduits and
water stops, temporary openings, cleaning, dressing, removal of formwork and false work,
filling bolt holes and any remedial work and for complying with Clause 2007, 2009, 2012
and Section 1800 including all incidental works required to complete the work as per
Specification.

SECTION 1800 FALSEWORK, FORMWORK, AND SURFACE FINISH FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES Page 18-12
 SECTION 1900 – BEARINGS AND EXPANSION JOINTS

Page No.

1901 EXPANSION JOINTS .............................................................................................19-1

1902 BEARINGS .................................................................................................................. 11

SECTION 2000 – CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES ........................................................ 1

2001 SCOPE ..................................................................................................................................................1

2002 DEFINITIONS ........................................................................................................................................1

2003 MATERIAL FOR CONCRETE ...................................................................................................................1

2004 DESIGN OF CONCRETE MIXES ...............................................................................................................6

2005 MIXING CONCRETE ............................................................................................................................ 12

2006 TRANSPORTATION OF CONCRETE ...................................................................................................... 13

2007 PLACING OF CONCRETE...................................................................................................................... 13

2008 COMPACTION OF CONCRETE ............................................................................................................. 16

2009 CURING OF CONCRETE ....................................................................................................................... 17

2010 PROTECTION OF FRESH CONCRETE .................................................................................................... 18

2011 CONCRETING IN HOT WEATHER ......................................................................................................... 18

2012 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS ..................................................................................................................... 19

2013 RECORDS OF CONCRETE PLACING ...................................................................................................... 20

2014 REINFORCEMENT ............................................................................................................................... 20

2015 CONCRETE FOR SECONDARY PURPOSES ............................................................................................ 22

2016 EARLY LOADING ................................................................................................................................. 23

2017 TEST AND STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE .............................................................................................. 23

2018 MEASUREMNT ................................................................................................................................... 26

2019 PAYMENT .......................................................................................................................................... 27

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

SECTION 2000 – CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES

2001 SCOPE

This Section covers the materials, design of mixes, transport, placing, compaction and
curing of concrete and mortar required in the works. It also covers reinforcement for
concrete.
2002 DEFINITIONS
Structural concrete is any class of concrete which is used in reinforced, pre-stressed or
unreinforced concrete construction which is subject to stress.
Non-structural concrete is composed of materials complying with the Specification but for
which no strength requirements are specified and which is used only for filling foundations
and similar purpose where it is not subjected to significant stress.
A pour refers to the operation of placing concrete into any mould, bay or formwork, etc. and
also to the volume which has to be filled. Pours in vertical succession are referred to as lifts.
2003 MATERIAL FOR CONCRETE
(1) General
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer full details of all materials which he
purposes to use for making concrete. No concrete shall be placed in the works until
the Engineer has approved the materials of which it is composed. In accordance with
Clause 603, approved materials shall not thereafter be altered or substituted by other
materials without the consent of the Engineer.
(2) Cement
Cement shall comply with the requirements of Clause 614.
Cement shall be free flowing and free of lumps. It shall be supplied in the
manufacturer’s sealed unbroken bags or in bulk. Bagged cement shall be transported
in vehicles provided with effective means of ensuring that it is protected from the
weather.
Bulk cement shall be transported in vehicles or in containers built and equipped for
the purpose.
Cement in bags shall be stored in a suitable weatherproof structure of which the
interior shall be dry and well ventilated at all times. The floor shall be raised above
the surrounding ground level not less than 30 cm and shall be so constructed that no
moisture rises through it.
Each delivery of cement in bags shall be stacked together in one place. The bags shall
be closely stacked so as to reduce air circulation with min gap of 500 mm from outside
wall. If pallets are used, they shall be constructed so that bags are not damaged during
handling and stacking. Stack of cement bags shall not exceed 8 bags in height.
Different types of cement in bags shall be clearly distinguished by visible marking and
shall be stored in separate stacks.

SECTION 2000 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES Page 20-1

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Cement form broken bags shall not be used in the works. Cement in bags shall be used
in the order in which it is delivered.
Bulk cement shall be stored in weather proof silos which shall bear a clear indication
of the type of cement contained in them. Different types of cement shall not be mixed
in the same silo.
The Contractor shall provide sufficient storage capacity on site to ensure that his
anticipated programme of work is not interrupted due to lack of cement.
Cement which has become hardened or lumpy or fails to comply with the Specification
in any way shall be removed from the Site.
All cement for any one structure shall be from the same source as far as possible.
All cement used in the works shall be tested by the manufacturer. The manufacturer
shall provide the results of tests as given in Table 6.6 for each supply and for the last
six months of his production.
Each set of tests carried out by the manufacturer on samples taken from cement which
is subsequently to site shall relate to no more than one day’s output of each cement
plant.
The Contractor shall constitute each type of cement and not less than as specified in
Table 5.2, representative samples to be tested when instructed by the Engineer in a
laboratory acceptable to him, in case of the concrete mixes do not comply with the
requirements of this Specification.
Cement which is stored on site for longer than one month shall be tested in such
laboratory for every 200 tons or part thereof and at monthly intervals thereafter.
The Contractor shall keep full records of all data relevant to the manufacture, delivery,
testing and the cement used in the works and shall provide the Engineer with two
copies thereof.
(3) Fine Aggregate
Fine aggregate shall be clean hard and durable and shall be natural sand, crushed
gravel sand or crushed rock sand complying with IS 383. All the material shall be
in accordance Table 20.1.

Table 20.1 Grading Requirement for fine aggregate

IS sieve designation (mm) Percentage passing
10 100
4.75 90-100
2.36 75-100
1.18 55-90
0.60 35-59
0.30 8-30
0.15 0-10

SECTION 2000 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES Page 20-2

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

In order to achieve an acceptable grading, it may be necessary to blend materials

from more than one source. The deviation from the initial fineness modulus shall be
no more than ± 0.30 for ordinary concrete and ± 0.20 for high quality concrete.
However, in respect of the presence of deleterious materials the fine aggregate shall
not contain iron pyrites, iron oxides, mica, shale, coal or other laminar soft or porous
materials or organic matter unless the Contractor can show by comparative tests on
finished concrete as set out in Clause 617 and as per the direction of the Engineer, that
presence of such materials does not affect the properties of the concrete.
(4) Coarse Aggregate
Coarse aggregate shall be clean hard and durable crushed rock, crushed gravel or
natural gravel. Coarse aggregate shall be supplied in the nominal size called for in the
contract and shall be of the grading as specified in Table 20.2.
Table 20.2 Grading Requirement for Coarse Aggregate
IS Percentage Passing for Single Sized Aggregate Percentage Passing for Graded
sieve of nominal Size Aggregate of Nominal Size
S.N
Design 63 40 20 16 12.5 10 40 20 16 12.5
ation mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
i) 80 mm 100 100
85-
ii) 63 mm 100
100
85- 90-
iii) 40 mm 0-30 100 100
100 100
85- 90-
iv) 20 mm 0-5 0-20 100 30-70 100 100
100 100
85- 90-
v) 16 mm 100
100 100
12.5 85- 90-
vi) 100
mm 100 100
85-
vii) 10 mm 0-5 0-5 0-20 0-30 0-45 10-35 25-35 30-70 40-85
100
viii 4.75
0-5 0-5 0-10 0-5 0-10 0-10 0-10
) mm
2.36
ix)
mm
Other properties shall be set out below:
Flakiness Index: When tested in accordance with IS 2386 Part 1, the Flakiness Index
of the coarse aggregate shall be as set out hereunder:

For ordinary concrete : not more than 25

For high quality : not more than 15
concrete
If the Flakiness Index of the coarse aggregate varies by more than five units from the
average value of the aggregate used in the approved trial mix, then a new set of trial
mixes shall be carried out if the workability of the mixes has been adversely affected
by such variation.

SECTION 2000 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES Page 20-3

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Water Absorption: the aggregate shall not have a water absorption of more than 2 per
cent when tested as set out in IS: 2386 Part 3.
Los Angeles Abrasion (LAA): The aggregate shall have LAA not more than 45% for
ordinary concrete, and not more than 35% for high quality concrete, when tested in
accordance with IS: 2386 Part 4.
Aggregate Crushing Value (ACV): The aggregate shall have ACV not more than 30%
for pavement structure and not more than 45% for other structure when tested in
accordance with IS: 2486 Part 4.
Alkali Aggregate Reactivity: The aggregate shall comply with IS 456 when tested in
accordance with IS:386 Part 7.
(5) Testing Aggregate
(a) Acceptance Testing
The Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer samples containing not less than 50 kg of
any aggregate which he proposed to use in the works and shall supply such further
samples as the Engineer may require. Each sample shall be clearly labeled to show its
origin and shall be accompanied by all information called for in IS: 2386 Part 1 to 8.
Tests to determine compliance of the aggregates with the requirements of sub-clause
2003 (3) and (4) shall be carried out by the Contractor in a laboratory acceptable to
the Engineer. If the tested materials fail to comply with the Specification, further tests
shall be made in the presence of the Contractor and the Engineer. Acceptance of the
material shall be based on the results of such tests.
All the materials shall be accepted if the results of not less than three consecutive sets
of test executed in accordance with IS 2386 (Part 1-8) show compliance with the Sub-
clause 2003 (3) and (4).
(b) Compliance Testing/Process Control Testing
The Contractor shall carry out routine testing of aggregate for compliance with the
Specification during the period that concrete is being produced for the works.
Frequency test shall be as follows:
Test procedure Frequency
Fine aggregate and Grading Silt,Clay IS: 2386 Part 1 1 set ( 3 nos ) test for each
Contents and 10 to 50 cum and additional
Organic Impurities IS: 2386 Part2 test for each 50 cum of
concrete
Coarse Aggregate GradingSilt, Clay IS: 2386 Part 1 1 set ( 3 nos ) test for each
Contents and IS: 2386 Part2 25 to 125 cum and
Organic Impurities additional test for each 125
cum

If the aggregate from any source is variable, the frequency of testing shall be increased
as instructed by the Engineer. Chloride Content: As frequently as may be required to
ensure that the proportion of chlorides in the aggregates does not exceed the limit
stated in the Specification.

SECTION 2000 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES Page 20-4

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Sulphate Content and Alkali Aggregate Reactivity: As frequently as may be required

according to the variability of sulphate content and alkali reactivity assessed from the
laboratory test carried out during the concrete mix design.
(6) Delivery and Storage of Aggregate
Aggregate shall be delivered to site in clean and suitable vehicles. Different type or
sizes of aggregate shall not be delivered in one vehicle.
Each type or size of aggregate shall be stored in a separate bin or compartment having
a base such that the contamination of aggregate is prevented. Dividing walls between
bins shall be substantial and continuous so that no mixing of types or sizes occurs.
The storage of aggregate shall be arranged in such a way that drying out in hot weather
is prevented in order to avoid fluctuations in water content. Storage of fine aggregates
shall be arranged in such way that they can drain sufficiently before use in order to
prevent fluctuations in water content of the concrete.
(7) Water for Concrete Mortar
Water shall be reasonably clear and free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis,
salts, sugar, organic materials or other substances that may deleterious to concrete or
steel.
The Contractor shall carry out tests in compliance with IS 456 to establish
compliance with Specifications.
(8) Admixture
(a) General
The use of admixtures in concrete may be required under the contract to promote
special properties in the finished concrete or may be proposed by the Contractor to
assist him in compliance with the Specification.
In all cases the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer full details of the admixture he
proposes to use and the manner in which he proposes to add it in the mix. The
information provided shall include:
(i) The typical dosage, the method of dosing, and the detrimental effects of an
excess or deficiency in the dosage.
(ii) The chemical names of the main active ingredients in the admixture.
(iii) Whether or not the admixture contains chlorides, and if so the chloride ion
content expressed as a percentage by weight of admixture.
(iv) Whether the admixture leads to the entrainment of air when used at the
manufacturer’s recommended dosage, and if so the extent to which it does so.
(v) Details of previous uses of the admixture in
Myanmar.
Admixture/additives conforming to IS 9103 may be used subject to approval of the
Engineer. However, admixture/ additives generating hydrogen or nitrogen and
containing chlorides, nitrates, sulphides, sulphates or any other material likely to
adversely affect the steel or concrete shall not be permitted.

SECTION 2000 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES Page 20-5

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Compatibility of the admixtures with the cement and any other pozzolan or hydraulic
addition shall be ensured by for avoiding the following problems.
(i) Requirement of large dosage of superplasticizer for achieving the desired
workability.
(ii) Excessive retardation of setting
(iii) Excessive entrainment of large bubbles
(iv) Unusually rapid stiffening of concrete
(v) Rapid loss of slump
(vi) Excessive segregation and bleeding
(9) Curing Material
Curing material shall be moist curing or membrane curing . Approved curing
compound may be used , which shall be applied to all exposed surface of the concrete
as soon as possible after the concrete has set. Impermeaable membrane such as
polythene sheeting covering closely the concrete surface may also be used to provide
effective barrier against evaporation
2004 DESIGN OF CONCRETE MIXES
(1) Classes of Concrete
The classes of structural concrete to be used in the works shall be as shown on the
Drawing. Where sufficient test results for a particular grade of concrete are not
available, the value of standard deviation given in Table 8 of IS 456: 2000 may be
assumed for design of mix in the first instance. As soon as the results of samples are
available, actual calculated standard deviation shall be used and the mix designed
properly for reference Table 20.3 may be used, in which the class designation includes
two figures. The first figures indicate the characteristic strength fck at 28 days
expressed in N/mm2 and the second figure is the maximal nominal size of aggregate
in the mix expressed in millimeters. Letter M in the class designation stands for Mix,
letter SM stand for Special Mix.
Consistence of the mix, assessed through the Slump Test where the slump is measured
in millimeters, is designate as follows:
S: Stiff consistence, for slump ≤40
P: Plastic consistence, for slump >40 and ≤ 90
VP: Very Plastic consistence, for slump >90 and ≤ 150
F: Flowing consistence for slump >150
Table 20.3: Concrete Classes and Strength
Classes of Consi Type of Characteri Maximum Trial mixes Early works test cubes
Concrete st- uses stic Nominal Minimal Target Any one Average of Concrete
ence Strength Size of Strength result 3 mix
fck Aggreg ate fck=fck + 1.65*s (N/mm2) consecutive
(N/mm2) mm (N/mm2) results
(N/mm2)
M 10/75 S Ordinary 10 75 16 7 14 Designed

SECTION 2000 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES Page 20-6

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

M 10/40 S Ordinary 10 40 16 7 14 /
Prescribe
M 15/20 S Ordinary 15 20 21 12 19 d
M 15/40 S Ordinary 15 40 21 12 19
M 20/20 S Ordinary 20 20 27 16 24 Designe
d
M 20/40 S Ordinary 20 40 27 16 24
M 25/20 S Ordinary 25 20 32 21 29
M 25/40 S Ordinary 25 40 32 21 29
M 30/40 S High Quality 30 40 38 26 34
M 30/20 P High Quality 30 20 38 26 34
M 30/12 P High Quality 30 12 38 26 34
M 35/40 P High Quality 35 40 43 31 39
M 35/20 P High Quality 35 20 43 31 39
M 40/20 P High Quality 40 20 48 36 44
M 45/20 P High Quality 45 20 53 41 49 Designe
d
M 50/20 P High Quality 50 20 58 46 54
M 55/20 P High Quality 50 20 63 51 59
SM 30/40 VP Underwater 30 40 38 26 34
SM 30/20 VP Underwater 30 20 38 26 34
SM 30/20 F Bored Piles 30 20 38 26 34
SM 40/20 S Precast Piles 40 20 48 36 44
Post-
tensioned
SM 45/20 S Girders 45 20 53 41 49

(2) Design of Proposed Mixes

Concrete mixes shall comply with Clause 617.
The contractor shall design all the concrete mixes called for in the Drawing using the
ingredients which have been approved by the Engineer in accordance with Clause
2003 and in compliance with the following requirements:
(a) The aggregate portion shall be well graded from the nominal maximum size of
stone down to the 150-micron size.
(b) The cement content shall be such to achieve the strength called for in Table 20.3
but in any case not less than the minimum necessary as shown in Table 20.4.
(c) The workability shall be consistent with ease of placing and proper compaction
having regard to the presence of reinforcement and other obstructions.
(d) The water/cement ratio shall be the minimum consistent with adequate
workability but in any case not greater than 0.5 for classes of concrete higher
than M20 taking due account of any water contained in the aggregates. The
Contractor shall take into account that this requirement may in certain cases
require the inclusion of a workability agent in the mix.
(e) For each class of concrete Contractor shall conduct laboratory trial as mentioned
in 2004(3) based on the results of these trials the contractor shall submit full
details of his proposal including the result of test to the Engineer for approval.

SECTION 2000 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES Page 20-7

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

However, Engineer’s approval shall not relieve the contractor from his
responsibilities for compliance with these specifications.
(f) The cement content shall not more than 450 kg/ m3 unless special consideration
has been given in design to cover the risk of cracking due to drying and shrinkage
in thin sections or to early thermal cracking and to the increased risk of damage
due to alkali silica reactions.
Table 20.4: Minimum Cement Content and Maximum water cement ratio

SN Exposure Minimum cement Maximum free Minimum

content in kg/ water cement Grade of
cu.m. ratio Concrete
A. Plain Cement concrete
1 Mild 220 0.6
2 Moderate 240 0.6 M15
3 Severe 250 0.5 M20
B. Reinforced Cement concrete
1 Mild 300 0.55 M20
Note:
1. The minimum cement contents shown in the above table are required in order to achieve
impermeability and durability having 20 mm size aggregate, in case of 10 mm size add 40 kg/ m3 and
in case of 40 mm size aggregate reduce upto 30 kg / m3. In order to meet the strength requirements in
the Specification higher contents may be required.
2. Exposure can classified as
Mild: Concrete surface protected against weather or aggressive conditions Moderate: Concrete
surfaces sheltered from severe rain or freezing whilst wet concrete exposed to condensation and rain.
Concrete continuously under water. Concrete in contact or buried under non aggressive soil/ ground
water.
Severe: Concrete surface exposed to severe rain, alternate wetting and drying or occasional freezing
whilst or severe condensation

(3) Prescribed Mixes

Prescribed mixes shall have the proportion mentioned below
Classes of Type of uses Characteristic Concrete mix Mix proportion in
concrete Strength case of Prescribed
fck mix
(N/mm2)
M 10/75 Ordinary 10 Prescribed 1:3:6
M 10/40 Ordinary 10 1:3:6
M 15/20 Ordinary 15 1:2:4
M 15/40 Ordinary 15 1:2:4

Concrete mix shall be proportioned by volume. The Engineer may instruct to slight
adjustment in the proportioning to allow for variations in the specific gravity and
grading of aggregates. Such variation shall not be deemed to vary the price of the
concrete. The Engineer shall require the contractor to make trial mixes and test work
cubes to satisfy himself that the prescribed mix will give expected strengths . No
concrete shall be placed in the works until the relevant mix has been approved by the
Engineer and no variation shall be made in the mix after approval without the

SECTION 2000 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES Page 20-8

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Engineer’s consent, who may require further tests to be made.

(4) Laboratory Trial Mixes
For each mix of concrete the Contractor shall prepare three number of concrete batches
with the proportion as per designed or prescribed mix as specified in the contract. The
Following test shall be carried out for each sample of each batch.
 Slump of concrete
 Compressive strength of each concrete cubes. [six test cube from each batch
prepared and 3 cube test for 7 days and 3 for 28 days]
 Density of concrete cube
Modified compositions, the quantities of other constituents being unchanged:
Water : +10% 1 batch
Water : -10% 1 batch
Cement : +15% 1 batch
Cement : -15% 1 batch
Samples shall be taken from each batch and the following action taken, all in
accordance with IS: 516.

(*) For “Smaller Contracts Works”, the following composition are suggested as a

Concrete Characteristic Cement Total Fine aggr./ Water Workability

Class Strength (kg) Aggregate Total aggr. (max)
N/mm2 (kg) (%) (lit.)
M 15/40 15 250 1900 35-45 160 Stiff-Plastic
M 15/20
M 20/20 20 300 1875 35-45 165-170 Stiff
M 30/40 30 350 1825 35-45 170 Stiff
M 30/20 30 350 1825 35-45 175 Plastic

M 35/20 35 350 1825 35-45 175 Plastic

starting basis for the Laboratory trials for one cu.m. of concrete.
A “result” being the average strength of the three cubes from one batch, the average
of the three results form tests at 28 days for the nominal composition shall not be less
than the Minimal Target Strength shown in Table 20.3.
One result from the modified compositions shall not be less than the nominal strength
as shown on Table 20.3.
(4) Site Trials
At least six weeks before commencing placement of concrete in the permanent works,
site trials shall be prepared for each class of concrete specified.
For each mix of concrete for which the Contractor has proposed a design and
successfully tested in Laboratory, he shall prepare three separate batches specified
hereunder using the materials which have been approved for use in the works and the

SECTION 2000 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES Page 20-9

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

mixing plant which he propose to use for the works. The volume of each batch shall
be the capacity of the concrete mixer proposed for full production.
Samples shall be taken from each batch and the action taken similar to the above Sub-
clause 2004 (3) (a) to (e)
The average of the three results of tests at 28 days shall not be less than the Minimal
Target Strength shown in Table 20.3.
The Contractor shall also carry out tests to determine the drying shrinkage of the
concrete unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
Based on the results of the tests on the Laboratory trial and site trial mixes, the
Contractor shall submit full details of his proposals for mix design to the Engineer,
including the type and source of each ingredient, and the results of the tests on the trial
mixes.
If the Engineer does not agree to a proposed concrete mix for any reason, the
Contractor shall amend his proposals and carry out further trial mixes. No mix shall
be used in the works without the written consent of the Engineer.
(5) Quality control of Concrete Production
(a) Sampling
For each class of concrete in production at each plant for use in the works, samples of
concrete shall be taken at the point of mixing or of deposition as instructed by the
Engineer, all in accordance with the sampling procedures described in IS: 516 and
with the further requirements set out below.
Six 150 mm or 200 mm cubes as appropriate shall be made from each sample and shall
be cured and tested in accordance with IS: 516 three at seven days and the other three
at 28 days. Where information samples are required, such as for post tensioning
operations, three additional cubes shall be made.
The minimum frequency of sampling of concrete of each grade shall be as following:

For 1-5 m3 quantity of work at one place - 1 set of sample

3
For > 5-15 m quantity of work - 2 set. of sample
For > 15-30 m3 quantity of work - 3 set. of sample
3
For > 30 - 50 m quantity of work - 4 set. of sample
3
For more than 50 m quantity of work 4 set .of sample plus one additional for
each 50 m3 or part thereof.
At least one set of sample shall be taken from each shifts of work.
Until compliance with the Specification has been established the frequency of
sampling shall be three times that stated above and not less than 3 samples/day for
each class of concrete in production at each plant or such lower frequency as may be
instructed by the Engineer.
(b) Testing

SECTION 2000 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES Page 20-10

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

(i) The slump of the concrete shall be determined for each batch from which
samples are taken and in addition for other batches at the point of production and
deposition or at the frequency instructed by the Engineer.
The slump of concrete in any batch shall not differ from the value established by
the trial mixes by more than 25 mm or one third of the value whichever is the
less.
(ii) The air content of air entrained concrete in any batch shall be within 1.5 times
of the required value and the average value of four consecutive measurements
shall be within the required value expressed as a percentage of the volume of
freshly mixed concrete while tested according to IS: 1199.
(iii) Early Works: Until such times as sufficient test results are available to apply the
method of control described in (iv) below, the compressive strength of the
concrete at 28 days shall be such that no result (average of 3 cubes) is less than
the characteristic strength fck as shown in Table 20.3 under the heading “early
works test cubes” and also that the average of three consecutive results in not
less than fck +4 as shown in Table 20.3 under the same heading.
The 7-day cube result may be used as an early strength indicator, at the discretion
of the Engineer.
(iv) When at least 20 consecutive results on tested batches are available for any class
of concrete mixed in any one plant, no single result shall be less than fck -4
(N/mm2) and also the average of any group of three consecutive results shall not
be less than fck +4 (N/mm2).
In addition, the Coefficient of Variation shall be less than the figure given below:
Number of Batches Maximum coefficient of variation
Ordinary concrete High quality concrete
After 20 tested batches 18% 15%
After 50 tested batches 15% 12%
Standard Deviation of the results
Where the Coefficient of Variation =
Average Value of the results
(v) Failure to comply with requirements:
If any one result in a group of three consecutive results is less than fck -4
(N/mm2), but the other results of group satisfy the strength requirement, then
only the batch from which the failed result was obtained shall be deemed not to
comply with the Specification.
If the average strength of the group is less than the strength requirement then all
the batches between those represented by the first and the last result shall be
deemed not to comply with the Specification, and the Contractor shall
immediately adjust the production procedure or the mix design subject to the
agreement of the Engineer to restore compliance with the Specification. If

SECTION 2000 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES Page 20-11

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

adjustment of the mix design is agreed, the Contractor shall again be required to
comply with Sub-clauses 2004 (3) and 2004 (4).
The Contractor shall take necessary action to remedy concrete which does not
comply with this Specification. Such action may include but not necessarily
confined to the following:
Increasing the frequency of sampling until control is again established.
Carrying out non-destructive testing such as ultrasonic measurement, load tests
or other appropriate methods.
Cutting test scores from the concrete and testing in accordance with IS: 1199.
Carrying out strengthening or other remedial work to the concrete where
possible or appropriate.
Removing the concrete.
2005 MIXING CONCRETE
(1) Proportioning
Concrete mixes shall be proportioned according to the Design mix or Prescribed mix
as specified. All mixing operations shall be supervising by experienced supervisor.
Cement and aggregate shall be batched by weight or by volume as specified in the
contract. Water may be measured by weight or volume. The quantity of cement, each
size of aggregate and water as indicated by the mechanism employed shall be within
a tolerance of plus or minus three percent of the respective weight/ volume per batch
agreed by the Engineer. The water to be added to the mix shall be reduced by the
amount of free water contained in the coarse and fine aggregates. This amount shall
be determined by the Contractor by a method agreed by the Engineer.
(2) Machine Mixing
Concrete for the work s shall be batched and mixed in one or more plants or concrete
mixer unless the Engineer agrees to some other arrangement. If concrete mixers are
used, there shall be sufficient number of mixtures including stand by mixers.
Batching and mixing plants shall be complying with the requirements of IS: 1791 and
capable of producing a uniform distribution of the ingredients throughout the mass.
Truck mixers shall comply with the requirements of IS: 4925 and shall only be used
with the prior approval of the Engineer. If the plant proposed by the Contractor does
not fall within the scope of IS: 1791 it shall have been tested in accordance with IS:
4634 and shall have a mixing performance within the limits of IS: 1791.
All mixing operations shall be under the control of an experienced supervisor
The aggregate storage bins shall be provided with drainage facilities arranged so that
the drainage water is not discharged to the weigh hoppers. Each bin shall be drawn at
least once per week and any accumulations of mud or silt shall be removed
If bulk cement is used, the scale and weight hopper for cement shall be distinct from
the scale and weight hopper for aggregates.

SECTION 2000 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES Page 20-12

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Cement and aggregates shall be batched by weight. Water may be measured by

weight or volume.
The weighing and water dispensing mechanisms shall be maintained in good order
The nominal drum or pan capacity of the mixer shall not be exceeded. The turning
speed and the mixing time shall be as recommended by the manufacturer, but in
addition, when water is the last ingredient to be added, mixing shall continue for at
least one minute after all the water has been added to the drum or the pan.
The blades of pan mixers shall be maintained within the tolerances specified by the
manufacturer of the mixer and the blades shall be replaced when it is no longer
possible to maintain the tolerances by adjustment.
Mixers which have been out of use for more than 30 minutes shall be thoroughly
cleaned before any fresh concrete is mixed. Mixers shall be cleaned out before
changing to another type of cement.
(3) Hand Mixing
Concrete for structural purposes generally shall not be mixed by hand. However, for
small volumes of works and where non-structural concrete is required, hand mixing
may be carried out subject to approved of the Engineer.
For making hand mixing concrete, cement, sand and aggregate shall be batched
separately by volume or by weight as applicable. Then cement and sand shall be mixed
dry to uniform colour. The aggregate shall be stacked in a proper shape upon which
cement sand mix shall be spread and whole mix shall be mixed to uniform consistency.
For hand mixed concrete the specified quantities of cement shall be increased by 10
% and not more than 0.25 cubic meter shall be mixed at one time. During windy
weather precautions shall be taken to prevent cement from being blown away in the
process of gauging and mixing.
2006 TRANSPORTATION OF CONCRETE
The concrete shall be discharged from the mixer and transported to the works by means
which shall prevent adulteration, segregation or loss of ingredients, and shall ensure that the
concrete is of the required workability at the point and time of placing. The loss of slump
between discharge from the mixer and placing shall be within the tolerances specified in
Sub-clause 2004 (5) (b) (i).
The capacity of the means of transport shall not be less than the full volume of a batch.
The time elapsing between mixing transporting placing and compacting altogether of a batch
of concrete shall not be longer than the initial setting time of the concrete. If the placing of
any batch of concrete is delayed beyond this period, the concrete shall not be placed in the
works.
2007 PLACING OF CONCRETE
(1) Consent for Placing
Concrete shall not be placed until the Engineer’s consent has been given in writing.

SECTION 2000 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES Page 20-13

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least two full working day notice of his
intention to place concrete.
If concrete placing is not commenced within 24 hours of the Engineer’s consent the
Contractor shall again request consent as specified above.
(2) Preparation of Surface to Receive Concrete
Excavated surfaces on which concrete is to be deposited shall be prepared as set out
in Section 900.
Existing concrete surfaces shall be prepared as set out in Clause 2012. Before
deposition of further concrete, they shall be clean, hard and sound and shall be wet but
without any free standing water.
Any flow of water into an excavation shall be diverted through proper side drains to a
sump or be removed by other suitable which will prevent washing away the freshly
deposited concrete or any of its constituents. Any under drain constructed for this
purpose shall be completely grouted up when they are no longer required by a method
agreed by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer surfaces against which concrete is to be
placed shall receive prior coating of cement slurry or mortar mixed in the proportions
similar to those of the fines proportions similar to those of the fines portion in the
concrete to be placed. The mortar shall be kept ahead of the concrete. The mortar shall
be placed into all parts of the excavated surface and shall not be less than 5 mm thick.
If any fissures have been cleaned out they shall be filled with mortar or with concrete
as instructed by the Engineer.
The amount of mortar placed at one time shall be limited so that it does not dry out or
set before being covered with concrete.
(3) Placing Procedures
The Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as possible in its final position. It shall be
placed so as to avoid segregation of the concrete and displacement of the
reinforcement, other embedded items or form work. It shall be brought up in layers
approximately parallel to the construction joint planes and not exceeding 300 mm in
compacted thickness unless otherwise permitted or directed by the Engineer, but the
layers shall not be thinner than four times the maximum nominal size of aggregate.
When placing on a nearly horizontal surface, placing shall start at the lower end of the
surface to avoid decompaction of concrete.
Layers shall not be placed so that they form feather edges nor shall they be placed on
a previous layer which has taken its initial set. In order to comply with this
requirement, another layer may be started before initial set of the preceding layer.
All the concrete in a single bay or pour shall be placed as a continuous operation. It
shall be carefully worked round all obstructions, irregularities in the foundations and
the like so that all parts are completely full of compacted concrete with no segregation

SECTION 2000 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES Page 20-14

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

or honey combing. It shall also be carefully worked round and between water stops,
reinforcement, embedded steelwork and similar items which protrude above the
surface of the completed pour.
All work shall be completed on each batch of concrete before its initial set commences
and thereafter the concrete shall not be disturbed before it has set hard. No concrete
that has partially hardened during transit shall be used in the works and the transport
of concrete from the mixer to the point of placing shall be such that this requirement
can be complied with.
Concrete shall not be placed during rain which is sufficiently heavy or prolonged to
wash mortar from coarse aggregate on the exposed faces of fresh concrete. Means
shall be provided to remove any water accumulating on the surface of the placed
concrete. Concrete shall not be deposited into such accumulations of water.
In dry weather, covers shall be provided for all fresh concrete surfaces which are not
being worked on. Water shall not be added to concrete for any reason.
When concrete is discharged from the place above its final deposition, segregation
shall be prevented by the use of chutes, down pipes, trunking, baffles or other
appropriate devices.
Forms for walls shall be provided with openings or other devices that will permit the
concrete to be placed in a manner that will prevent segregation and accumulations of
hardened concrete on the formwork or reinforcement above the level of the placed
concrete.
When it is necessary to place concrete under water the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer his proposals for the method and equipment to be employed. The concrete
shall be deposited either by bottom-discharging watertight containers or through
funnel- shaped tremies which are kept continuously full with concrete in order to
reduce to a minimum the contact of the concrete with the water. Special care shall be
taken to avoid segregation.
If the level of concrete in a tremie pipe is allowed to fall to such extent that the water
enters the pipe, the latter shall be removed from the pour and filled with concrete
before being again lowered into the placing position. During and after concreting
under water, pumping or dewatering in the immediate vicinity shall be suspended if
there is any danger that such work will disturb the freshly placed concrete.
(4) Interruptions to Placing
If the concrete placing is interrupted for any reason and the duration of the interruption
cannot be forecast or is likely to be prolonged, the Contractor shall immediately take
the necessary action to form a construction joint so as to eliminate as far as possible
feather edges and sloping top surfaces and shall thoroughly compact the concrete in
accordance with Clause 2008. All work on the concrete shall be completed before
elapse of initial setting time and it shall not thereafter be disturbed until it is hard
enough to resist damage. Plant and materials to comply with this requirement shall be

SECTION 2000 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES Page 20-15

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

readily available at all time during concrete placing.

Before concreting is resumed after such an interruption the Contractor shall cut out
and remedy all damaged or uncompacted concrete, feather edges or any undesirable
features and shall leave a clean sound surface against which the fresh concrete may be
placed.
If it becomes possible to resume concrete placing without contravening the
Specification and the Engineer consents to a resumption, the new concrete shall be
thoroughly worked in and compacted against the existing concrete so as to eliminate
any cold joints.
In case of long interruption concrete shall be resumed as directed by Engineer.
(5) Dimension of Pours
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, pours shall not be more than two meters
high and shall as far as possible have a uniform thickness over the plan area of the
pour. Concrete shall be placed to the full planned height of all pours except in the
circumstances described in Sub-clause 2007 (4).
The Contractor shall plan the dimensions and sequence of pours in such a way that
cracking of the concrete does not take place due to thermal or shrinkage stresses.
(6) Placing Sequence
The Contractor shall arrange that the intervals between successive lifts of concrete in
one section of the works are of equal duration. This duration shall not be less than
three days or not more than seven days under temperate weather conditions unless
otherwise agreed by the Engineer.
Where required by the Engineer to limit the opening of construction joints due to
shrinkage, concrete shall not be placed against adjacent concrete which is less than 21
days old.
Contraction gaps in concrete shall be of the widths and in the locations as shown on
the Drawing and they shall not be filled until the full time interval shown on the
Drawing has elapsed.
2008 COMPACTION OF CONCRETE
Concrete shall be fully compacted throughout the full extent of the placed layer. It shall
thoroughly worked against the formwork and around any reinforcement and other embedded
item, without displacing them. Care shall be taken at arises or other confined spaces.
Successive layers of the same pour shall be thoroughly worked together.
Concrete shall be compacted with the assistance of mechanical of immersion vibrators,
unless the Engineer agrees another method.
Immersion and surface vibrators shall operate at a frequency of between 70 and 200 hertz.
The Contractor shall ensure that vibrators are operated at pressures and voltages not less
than those recommended by the manufacturer in order that the compactive effort is not
reduced.
A sufficient number of vibrators shall be operated to enable the entire quantity of concrete
being placed to be vibrated for the necessary period and, in addition, stand-by vibrators

SECTION 2000 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES Page 20-16

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

shall be available for instant use at each place where concrete is being placed.
Vibration shall be continued at each until the concrete ceases to contract, air bubbles have
ceased to appear, and a thin layer of mortar has appeared on the surface. Vibrators shall not
be used to move concrete laterally and shall be withdrawn slowly to prevent the formation
of voids.
The vibrators shall be inserted vertically into the concrete to penetrate the layer underneath
at regular spacing which shall not exceed the distance from the vibrator over which
vibration is visibly effective and some extent of vibration is overlapped.
Vibration shall not be applied by way of reinforcement nor shall the vibrator be allowed to
touch reinforcement, sheathing ducts or other embedded items.
2009 CURING OF CONCRETE
(1) General
Concrete shall be protected during the first stage of hardening from loss of moisture
and from the development of temperatures differentials within the concrete sufficient
to cause cracking. Concrete shall be cured with wet cotton mat, sheet material or other
compound for curing approved by the Engineer. The methods used for curing shall
not cause damage of any kind to the concrete.
Curing shall be continued for as long as may be necessary to achieve the above
objectives but not less than seven days or until the concrete is covered by successive
construction whichever is the shorter period.
The above objectives shall be dealt with in Sub-clauses 2009 (2) and 2009
(3) but nothing shall prevent both objectives being achieved by a single method where
circumstances permit.
The curing process shall commence as soon as the concrete is hard enough to resist
damage from the process. In the case of large areas or continuous pours, it shall
commence on the completed section of the pour before the rest of the pour is finished.
(2) Loss of Moisture
Exposed concrete surfaces shall be closely covered with impermeable sheeting,
properly secured to prevent its removal by wind and the development of air spaces
beneath it. Joints in the sheeting shall be lapped by at least 300 mm.
If it is not possible to use impermeable sheeting, the Contractor shall keep the exposed
surfaces continuously wet by means of water spray or by covering with a water
absorbent material which shall be kept wet, unless this method conflicts with Sub-
clause 2009 (3).
Water used for curing shall be of the same quality as that used for mixing.
Formed surfaces may be cured by retaining the formwork in place for the required
curing period.
Alternatively, Approved curing compound shall be used to cover exposed surface.

SECTION 2000 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES Page 20-17

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

If instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall, in addition to the curing provisions
set out above provide a suitable form of shading to prevent the direct rays of the sun
reaching the concrete surfaces for at least the first four days of the curing period.
(3) Limitation of Temperature Differentials
The Contractor shall limit the development of temperature differentials in concrete
after placing by any means appropriate to the circumstances including the following:
(a) limiting concrete temperatures at placing as set out in Sub-clause 2011 (2);
(b) use of low heat cement for mass concreting, subject to the agreement of the
Engineer;
(c) leaving formwork in place during the curing period. Steel forms shall be suitably
insulated on the outside;
(d) preventing rapid dissipation of heat from surfaces by shielding from wind.
2010 PROTECTION OF FRESH CONCRETE
Freshly placed concrete shall be protected from rainfall and from water running over the
surface until it is sufficiently hard to resist damage from these causes.
Concrete placed in the works shall not be subjected to any loading including traffic until it
has attained at least its characteristic strength as defined in Clause 2004.
2011 CONCRETING IN HOT WEATHER
(1) General
The Contractor shall prevent damage to concrete arising from exposure to extreme
temperatures, and shall maintain in good working order all plant and equipment
required for this purpose
In the event that conditions become such that even with the use of equipment the
requirements cannot be met, concrete placing shall immediately cease until such time
as the requirements can again be met.
(2) Concrete Placing in Hot Weather
During hot weather the Contractor shall take all measures necessary to ensure that the
temperature of concrete at the time of placing in the works does not exceed 30oC and
that the concrete does not lose any moisture during transporting and placing.
Such measures may include but are not necessarily limited to the following:
(a) Shielding aggregates from direct sunshine.
(b) Use of a mist water spray on aggregates.
(c) Sun shields on mixing plants and transporting equipment.
Surfaces in which concrete is to be placed shall be shielded from direct sunshine and
surfaces shall be thoroughly wetted to reduce absorption of water from the concrete
placed on or against them.
After concrete has been placed, the selected curing process shall be commenced as
soon as possible. If any interval occurs between completion of placing and start of

SECTION 2000 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES Page 20-18

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

curing, the concrete shall be closely covered during the interval with polythene sheet
to prevent loss of moisture.
2012 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Whenever concrete is to be bonded to other concrete which has hardened, the surface of
contact between the sections shall be deemed a construction joint.
Where construction joints are shown in the Drawing, the Contractor shall form such joints
in such positions. The locations of joints, which the Contractor requires to make for the
purpose of construction, shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Construction joints
shall be in vertical or horizontal planes except in sloping slabs where they shall be normal
to the exposed surface or elsewhere where the Drawing require a different arrangement.
Construction joints shall be arranged as to reduce to a minimum the effects of shrinkage in
the concrete after placing, and shall be placed in the most advantageous positions with
regard to stresses in the structures and the desirability of staggering joints.
Feather edges of concrete at joints shall be avoided. Any feather edges which may have
formed where reinforcing bars project through a joint shall be cut back until sound concrete
has been reached.
The intersections of horizontal and near horizontal joints and exposed faces of concrete
shall appear as straight lines produced by use of a guide strip fixed to the formwork at the
top of the concrete lift, or by other means acceptable to the Engineer.
Construction joints formed as free surfaces shall not exceed a slope of 20 per cent from the
horizontal.
The surface of the fresh concrete in horizontal or near horizontal joints shall be thoroughly
cleaned and roughened by means of high pressure water, and air jets or wire brush, when
the concrete is hard enough to withstand the treatment without the leaching of cement. The
surface of vertical or near vertical joints shall be similarly treated if circumstances permit
the removal of formwork at a suitable time.
Where concrete has become too hard for the above treatment to be successful, the surface
whether formed or free shall be thoroughly scabbled by mechanical means, manually or wet
sand blasted and then washed with clean water. The indentations produced by scabbling
shall not be less than 10 mm deep and shall be away from the finished face by 40 mm.
If instructed by the Engineer the surface of the concrete shall be thoroughly brushed with a
thin layer of mortar composed of one part of cement to two parts of sand by weight and
complying with Sub-clause 2502 (2) immediately prior to the deposition of fresh concrete.
The mortar shall be kept just ahead of the fresh concrete being placed and the fresh layer
of concrete shall be thoroughly and systematically vibrated to full depth to ensure complete
bond with the adjacent layer.
No mortar or concrete shall be placed until the joint has been inspected and approved by the
Engineer.

SECTION 2000 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES Page 20-19

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

2013 RECORDS OF CONCRETE PLACING

Records of the details of every pour of concrete placed in the works shall be kept by the
Contractor in a form agreed by the Engineer. These records shall include class of concrete,
location of pour, date and duration of pour, ambient temperature and concrete temperature
at time of placing and all relevant meteorological information such as rain, wind etc.,
moisture contents of the aggregates, details of mixes batch numbers, cement batch number,
results of all tests undertaken, part of the structure and place where test cube samples are
taken from.
The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer four copies of these records each week covering
work carried out the preceding week. In addition, he shall supply to the Engineer monthly
histograms of all 28 day cubes strength results together with cumulative and monthly
standard deviations, Coefficient of Variation, and any other information which the Engineer
may require concerning the concrete placed in the works.
2014 REINFORCEMENT
(1) General
Reinforcement as plain bars ad deformed bars and steel fabric shall comply with the
following Standards.
NS: 191/ IS: 1786 for high strength deformed steel bars and wires.
IS: 1566 for steel mesh fabric.
NS: 84/ IS: 432 mild steel and medium tensile steel bars.
All reinforcement shall be from an approved manufacturer and, if required by the
Engineer, the Contractor shall submit the ISI certification mark or other test certificate
from the manufacturer acceptable to the Engineer.
The sampling and frequency of testing shall be as set out in the NS: 84 and NS: 191.
All reinforcement not complying with the Specification shall be removed from site.
(2) Storage of Reinforcement
All reinforcement shall be delivered to site either in straight lengths or cut and bent.
No reinforcement shall be accepted in long lengths which have been transported bent
over double.
Any reinforcement which is likely to remain in storage for a long period shall be
protected from the weather so as to avoid corrosion and pitting. All reinforcement
which has become corroded or pitted to an extent which, in the opinion of the
Engineer, will affect its properties shall either be removed from site or may be tested
for compliance with the appropriate Indian Standard in accordance with Sub-clause
2014 (1) at the Contractor expense.
Reinforcement shall be stored at least 150 mm above the ground on clean area free of
mud and dirt and sorted out according to category, quality and diameter.
(3) Bending Reinforcement

SECTION 2000 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES Page 20-20

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Unless otherwise shown on the Drawing, bending and cutting shall comply with IS:
2052.
The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the accuracy of any bar bending schedules
supplied and shall be responsible for cutting, bending, and fixing the reinforcement in
accordance with the Drawing.
Bars shall be bent mechanically using appropriate bar benders. Bars shall be bent cold
by the application of slow steady pressure. At temperature below 5oC the rate of
bending shall be reduced if necessary to prevent facture in the steel. Bending
reinforcement inside the forms shall not be permitted except for mild steel bars of
diameter less or equal to 12 mm, when it is absolutely necessary.
After bending, bars shall be securely tied together in boundless or groups and legibly
labelled as set out in IS: 2502.
(4) Fixing Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall be thoroughly cleaned. All dirt, scale, loose rust, oil and other
contaminants shall be removed before placing it in position. If the reinforcement is
contaminated with concrete form previous operation, it shall be cleaned before
concreting in that section.
Reinforcement shall be securely placed and fixed in position as shown in the drawing
or directed by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, all intersecting bars shall be either tied
together with not less than 1.6 mm diameter soft annealed iron wire and the end of
the wire turned into the body of the concrete, or shall be secured with a wire clip of
a type agreed by the Engineer.
Spacer blocks shall be used for ensuring that the correct cover is maintained on the
reinforcement. Blocks shall be as small as practicable and of a shape agreed by the
Engineer. They shall be made of mortar mixed in the proportions of one part of cement
to two parts of sand by weight. Wires cast into the block for tying in to the
reinforcement shall have not less than 1.6 mm diameter and shall be soft annealed iron.
Alternatively, another type of spacer block may be used subjected to the Engineer’s
approval.
All reinforcement shall be checked of shape, size, diameter and number where
necessary. Reinforcement shall be rigidly fixed so that it remain intact during placing
of concrete. Any fixers made to the formwork shall not remain within the space to be
occupied by the concrete being placed.
No splices shall be made in the reinforcement except where shown on the Drawing or
agreed by the Engineer. Splice lengths shall be as shown on the Drawing or directed
by the Engineer.
Reinforcement shall not be welded except where required by the contract or agreed by
the Engineer. If welding is employed, all welded splices shall be full penetration butt

SECTION 2000 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES Page 20-21

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

welds complying with the procedures set out in IS: 2751 or IS: 9417 as applicable.
Mechanical splices shall not be used unless the Engineer agrees otherwise. Acceptance
for welded or mechanical splices of approved design shall be based on qualification
tests to be carried out by the Contractor prior to start of the work. Construction control
testing as instructed by the Engineer shall be also carried out.
The Contractor shall ensure that reinforcement left exposed in the works shall not
suffer distortion, displacement or other damage. When it is necessary to bend
protruding reinforcement aside temporarily, the radius of the bend shall not be less
than four times the bar diameter for mild steel bars of six times the bar diameter for
high yield bars. Such bends shall be carefully straightened without leaving residual
kinks or damaging the concrete round them before concrete placing. In no
circumstances heating and bending of high yield bars shall be permitted.
Bars complying with IS: 1786 or other high tensile bars shall not be bent after placing
in the works.
2015 CONCRETE FOR SECONDARY PURPOSES
(1) Non-structural Concrete
Non-structural concrete (NS concrete) shall be used only for non-structural purposes
where shown on the Drawing.
NS concrete shall be compound of ordinary Portland cement and aggregate complying
with this Specification.
The weight of cement mixed with 0.3 cubic metres of combined aggregate shall not
be less than 50 kg. The mix shall be proportioned by weight or by volume. The
maximum aggregate size shall be 40 mm nominal.
The concrete shall be mixed by machine or by hand in accordance with Sub-clause
2015 (3) to a uniform colour and consistency before placing. The quantity of water
used shall not exceed that required to produce a concrete with sufficient workability
to be placed and compacted where required.
The concrete shall be compacted by hand towels or rammers or by mechanical
vibration.
(2) No Fines Concrete
No fines concrete (NF concrete) is intended for use where a porous concrete is required
and shall only be used where shown on the Drawing or instructed by the Engineer.
The mix shall consist of Ordinary Portland cement and aggregate complying with this
Specification. The aggregate size shall be 40 mm to 10 mm only. The weight of cement
mixed with 0.3 cubic metres of aggregate shall not be less than 50 kg. The quantity of
water shall not exceed that required to produce a smooth cement paste which will coat
evenly the whole of the aggregate.
(3) Hand Mixed Concrete
Concrete for structural purposes shall not be mixed by hand. Where non-structural

SECTION 2000 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES Page 20-22

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

concrete is required, hand mixing may be carried out subject to approval of the
Engineer.
For making hand mixed concrete, cement sand and aggregate shall be batched
separately by volume or by weight as applicable. Then cement and sand shall be mixed
dry to uniform colour. The aggregate shall be stacked in a proper shape upon which
cement sand mix shall be spread and whole mix shall be turned up and down to have
uniform mix of all ingredients. Then water shall be added as specified in Sub-clause
2015 (1) and shall be mixed to uniform consistency.
For hand mixed concrete the specified quantities of cement shall be increased by 10%
and not more than 0.25 cubic meter shall be mixed at one time. During windy weather
precautions shall be taken to prevent cement from being blown away in the process of
gauging and mixing.
2016 EARLY LOADING
No load shall be applied to any part of a structure until the specified curing period has
expired, and thereafter loading shall be allowed after approval by the Engineer. The
Engineer’s decision shall be based on the type of load to be applied, the age of concrete, the
magnitude of stress induced and the propping of the structure.
No structure shall be opened to traffic until test cubes have attained the specified minimum
28 days’ strength as defined in Clause 2004.

2017 TEST AND STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE

(1) General:
Concrete shall conform to the surface finish and tolerance as prescribed in these
specifications for respective components.
Random sampling and lot by lot of acceptance inspection shall be made for the 28
days’ cube strength of concrete.
Concrete under acceptance shall be notionally divided into lots for the purpose of
sampling, before commencement of work. The basis of delimitation of lots shall be as
follows;
i. No individual lot shall more than 30 cu.m. in volume
ii. Different grades of mixes of concrete shall be divided into separate lots
iii. Concrete of a lot shall be used in the same identifiable component of the
Bridge/ structure
(2). Sampling and testing
Concrete for making 3 test cubes shall be taken from a batch of concrete at point of
delivery into construction, according to procedure laid down in IS: 1199.
A random sampling procedure to ensure that each of the concrete batches forming
the lot under acceptance inspection has equal chance of being chosen for taking
cubes 150 mm cubes shall be made, cured and tested at the age of 28 days for

SECTION 2000 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES Page 20-23

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

compressive strength in accordance with IS: 516. The 28-day test strength result for
each cube shall form an item of the sample. Test at other age also shall also be
performed, if specified.
Where automated batching plant/ Ready Mixed Concrete Plant is located away from
the place of use and the time gap between production and placement is more than
initial setting time or where any ingredients are added subsequent to mixing, separate
set of samples shall be collected and tested at batching plant and at location of
placement. The results shall be compared and used to make suitable adjustment at
batching plants so that properties of concrete at placement are as per the requirements.
(3) Test specimen and sample strength:
Three test specimens shall be made from each sample for testing at 28 days. Additional
cubes maybe required for various purposes such as to determine the strength of
concrete at 7 days or for any other purpose.
The test strength of the sample shall be the average of the strength of 3 cubes. The
individual variation should not be more that ± 15 per cent of the average. If variation
is more, the test results of the sample are invalid.
The minimum frequency of sampling of concrete of each grade shall be in accordance
with Table 5.2.
(4) Acceptance criteria
(a) Compressive Strength
I Cubes
The concrete shall be taken as having the specified compressive strength when
both the following conditions are met:
i. The mean strength determined from any group of four consecutive non
overlapping samples exceeds the specified characteristic compressive
strength by 3 MPa.
ii. Strength of any sample is not less than the specified characteristic
compressive strength minus 3 MPa.
The quantity of concrete represented by the test results include the batches
from which the first and last samples were taken, together with all intervening
batches
II Cores
When the concrete does not satisfy both the condition given in I above,
representative cores shall be extracted from the hardened concrete for
compression test in accordance with the method described in IS: 1199 and
tested to establish whether the concrete satisfies the requirement of
compressive strength.
Evaluation of compressive strength by taking cores may also be done in case
of doubt regarding the grade of concrete used either due to poor workmanship
or based on result of cube strength tests the locations from which core samples

SECTION 2000 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES Page 20-24

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

are to be taken and their number shall be decided so as to be representative of

the whole of the concrete under consideration. However, in no case shall fewer
than three cores be tested. Cores shall be prepared and tested as described in
IS: 516. Concrete in the member represented by a core test shall be considered
acceptable if the average equivalent cube strength of the cores is equal to at
least 85 percent of the cube strength of the grade of concrete specified for the
corresponding age and no individual core has strength less than 75 percent of
the specified strength.
(b) Chloride and Sulphate Content
Where Choloride and Sulphate is specified ,The total chloride and sulphuric anhydride
(SO3) content of all the constituents of concrete as a percentage of mass of cement in
the mix shall not exceed the values given in this Section of the specifications.
(c) Density of Fresh Concrete
Where minimum density of fresh concrete is specified, the mean of any four
consecutive non-overlapping samples shall not be less than the specified value and
any individual sample result shall not be less than 97.5 per cent of the specified value.
(d) Density of Hardened Concrete
Where minimum density of hardened concrete is specified, the mean of any four
consecutive non – overlapping samples shall not be less than the specified value and
any individual sample result shall not be less than 97.5 per cent of the specified value.
(e) Permeability Test
Where Permeability of concrete is specified, water Permeability test as per DIN:
1048 Part 5 – 1991 shall be carried out as described below
i. A cylindrical test specimen 150 mm dia and 160 mm high shall be
prepared
ii. After 28 days of curing, the test will be conducted between 28 and 35
days. The test specimen shall be fitted in a machine such that the
specimen can be subjected to a water pressure upto7 bars.
iii. The concrete specimen shall be subjected to a water pressure of 0.5
N/mm2 from the top for the period of 3 days. The pressure shall be
maintained constant throughout the test period. If the water penetrates
through to the underside of the specimen, the test may be terminated and
the specimen rejected as fail.
iv. After 3 days, the pressure shall be released and the sample shall be taken
out. The specimen shall be split in the middle by compression applied on
two round bars on opposite sides above and below.
v. When the split faces show signs of drying (after 5 to 10 minutes) the
maximum depth of penetration in the direction of height shall be
measured with the scale and extent of water penetration established.
vi. The mean of maximum depth of penetration obtained from three
specimens thus tested, shall be taken as the test result and it shall not
exceed 25 mm

SECTION 2000 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES Page 20-25

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

If the concrete is not able to meet any of the standards of acceptance as

prescribed, the effect of such deficiency on the structure shall be
investigated by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer. Any additional
work required by the Engineer for such acceptance shall be carried out by
the Contractor at his cost. In such case payment for such work shall be made
at reduced rate proportional to reduced strength rate. In case the concrete is
not found to be acceptable even after investigation, the Contractor shall
remove the rejected concrete forthwith.
2018 MEASUREMENT
(1) Concrete
Concrete laid in place as specified in the Drawing or directed by the Engineer shall be
measured in cubic metre separately for each class. No deduction shall be made in the
measurement for:
(a) bolt holes, pockets, box outs an cast in components provided that the volume of
each is less than 0.15 cubic metres;
(b) mortar beds, fillets, drips, rebates, recesses, grooves, chamfers and the like of
100 mm total width or less;
(c) reinforcement
(2) Blinding Concrete/Non Structural Concrete
Blinding concrete laid in place shall be measured in cubic metre. No deduction shall
be made for openings provided that the area of each is less than 0.5 square metres.
Blinding concrete over hard material shall be measured as the volume used provided
that the maximum thickness of 150 mm allowed for over break in not exceeded.
(3) Admixtures, Workability and Hardening Agents and Curing Compounds
Unless stated otherwise, rate of concrete shall deemed to include admixture,
workability, hardening agent and curing compounds.
(4) Reinforcement
All types of reinforcement shall be measured in length including hooks, if any,
separately for different diameters as actually used in works or as directed by the
Engineer, excluding overlaps. From the length so measured, the weight of
reinforcement shall be calculated in ton on the basis of IS: 1732.
Wastage, overlaps, couplings, welded joints, spacer bars, chairs, stays, hangers and
annealed steel wire or other method for binding and placing shall not be measured
and cost of these items shall be deemed to be included in the rates for reinforcement.
An average weight of at least 5 samples each one metre length shall be determined by
the laboratory approved by the Engineer. The weight of each type of the reinforcement
shall be determined by multiplying average weight of the respective reinforcement by
its length.
(5) Fabric Reinforcement
Fabric reinforcement laid as per Drawing or as directed by the Engineer shall be
measured in square meter. No allowance shall be made for laps and wastage.

SECTION 2000 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES Page 20-26

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

2019 PAYMENT
(1) Concrete
Every class of concrete shall be paid as per respective contract unit rate. In addition to
those specified in Clause 112 the respective rate shall also include the cost of:
(a) All materials including admixture and workability agent, curing agent, labour,
Tools, Plants and equipment required for mixing, transporting and placing in
position, vibrating and compacting, finishing and curing including all incidental
expenses.
(b) Unless mentioned separately as an item in contract sampling and testing, quality
assurance and supervision
(c) Unless mentioned separately as an item in contract, cost of providing, fixing, and
removing formwork, Staging required for concrete work as per Section 1800 of
these specification.
(d) Placing and compacting against excavated surfaces where required including any
additional concrete to fill over break and working space.
(e) Complying with the requirements of Clauses 2001 to 2013, 1806 and 1807.
(2) Reinforcement
The reinforcement shall be paid at contract unit rate. In addition to those specified in
Clause 112 the rate shall also include compensation for the cost of providing, cutting
to length, splice lengths additional to those shown on the Drawing, laps, bending,
hooking, waste incurred by cutting, cleaning, spacer blocks, provision and fixing of
chairs or other types of support, welding, fixing the reinforcement in position
including the provision of wire or other material for supporting and tying the
reinforcement in place, bending reinforcement aside temporarily, and straightening,
place and compacting concrete around reinforcement and for complying with Clause
2014.
(3) Fabric Reinforcement
The fabric reinforcement shall be paid at contract unit rate which shall be also
inclusive of compensation for wastage and laps.

SECTION 2000 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES Page 20-27

SECTION 2200 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK Page 22-29
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

SECTION 2300 TIMBER CONSTRUCTION Page 23-

30
 SECTION 2400 – RIVER TRAINING AND PROTECTION WORKS
Page No.

2401. MANUAL WOVEN GABIONS 24-1

2402. MECHANICALLY WOVEN CRATES (GABIONS AND MATTRESS) 24-ERROR! BOOKMARK NOT
DEFINED.

2403. GEOSYNTHETICS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS 24-14

2404 GEOTEXTILES FOR FILTRATION, DRAINAGE, AND SEPARATION 24-18

2405 GEOGRID 24-22

2406 GEOCOMPOSITE DRAINS 24-23

2407 GEOCELL FOR SLOPE PROTECTION 24-26

2408 GEOSYNTHETIC MAT 24-27

2409 NATURAL GEOTEXTILE 24-29

2410 PAVING FABRICS/GLASS GRIDS 24-31

2411 SOIL NAILING SYSTEM (WITH SEMI-FLEXIBLE 3D GALVANIZED STEEL MAT) FOR SLOPE
PROTECTION 24-35

2412. CRIB WALLS 24-45

2413. SLOPE STABILISATION AND SURFACE EROSION PROTECTION 24-48

2414. SUB-SURFACE DRAINS 24-54

2415. DRILLED SUB-SURFACE DRAINS 24-59

2416. SCOUR PROTECTION AND RIVER TRAINING WORKS 24-60

 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

SECTION 2400 – RIVER TRAINING AND PROTECTION WORKS

2401. MANUAL WOVEN GABIONS
(1) Scope
This Clause covers the furnishing of materials and construction of gabion works that
may be required to act as buttresses, retaining walls, catch wall, stream or river training
structures, check dams within gullies, or where placed as mattresses, to prevent stream
or gully erosion.
(2) Materials
(a) Stone
Stones used for filling the gabion boxes or mattresses shall be clean, hard, sound,
unweathered and angular rock fragments or boulders. The specific gravity of the stone
shall be not less than 2.50 and the stones shall not absorb water more than 5 percent
when tested as per IS: 1124. The length of any stone shall not exceed three times its
dimension of the mesh of the crate. However smaller size of stones as spalls shall be
allowed for filling voids and its volume including voids shall not be more than 20
percent of the total volume of the stone. Before filling any gabion boxes and mattresses
the Contractor shall submit representative samples of the rock he proposes to use in the
gabion for approval by the Engineer. Further representative samples shall be submitted
for approval each time when there is a change in the type and strength of the rock.
(b) Gabion
Gabions shall consist of steel wire mesh crates. The steel wire shall be mild steel wire
complying with NS 163-2045. All wires used in the manufacturing crates and
diaphragms, binding and connecting lids and boxes shall be galvanized with an heavy
coating of zinc by an electrolytic or hit dip galvanizing process. The weight of
deposition of zinc shall be in accordance with NS: 163. Zinc coating shall be uniform
and be able to withstand minimum number of dips and adhesion test specified as per
NS:163. Tolerance on diameter of wire shall be ± 2.5 percent. The tensile strength
shall be between 350 to 550 N/mm2
The wire shall be woven into an hexagonal mesh with a minimum of 2 twists as shown
in fig 24.1. All edges of the crates shall be finished with a selvedge wire at least 2
gauges heavier than the mesh wire. Gabions shall be manufactured in the standard sizes
with mesh and wire sizes as shown in Table 24.1
Diaphragms shall be manufactured of the same materials as the parent gabion box and
shall have selvedge wire throughout their perimeter. The number and size of
diaphragms to be provided with each crate shall be as in Table 24.1. All crates shall be
supplied with binding and connecting wire of the gauges shown in Table 24.1 of
sufficient quantity to bind all diaphragms and closing edges.

SECTION 2400 RIVER TRAININGS AND PROTECTION WORKS Page 24-1

 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Fig. 24.1 Double twisted wire mesh

Table 24.1: Standard Size of Wire Mesh Gabions

Mesh Type (DXH) 10 X 12 8 X 10 6X8
‘D’, mm 100 80 60
Wire Type Heavy Zinc coated
Mesh Wire Dia., mm / SWG 3.25/10 3.25/10 2.64/12
Edge / Selvedge wire Dia., mm/
4.06/8 4.06/8 3.25/10
SWG
Lacing wire dia, mm/ SWG 2.64/12 2.64/12 2.03/14

Box Gabions:
3 x 1 x 1 / 2 Nos, 2 x 1 x 1 / 1 No, 1.5 x 1 x 1 / 0 No,
Typical Sizes 3 x 1 x 0.75 / 2 Nos, 2 x 1 x 0.75 / 1 No, 3 x 1 x 0.5 / 2 2 x 1
Length x Width x Height (m) / x 0.5 / 1 No , 1 x 1 x 0.5 / 0 Nos, ,3 x 1 x 0.3 / 2 2 x 1 x 0.3 /
Number of diaphragms 1 No , 1 x 1 x 0.3 / 0 Nos, ,

Tolerances in Size of Gabion

Gabion boxes ± 3%, mesh opening +16 % to - 4 %,
Boxes

(c) General Requirements

Before filling any gabion boxes and mattresses, the Contractor shall submit samples of
gabion boxes and/or gabion mattresses assembled, erected and filled with stones for
approval which, when approved, shall be retained for reference and comparison with
the gabions built as part of the permanent works. The size, type and location of the
samples shall be as directed by the Engineer.

Gabion boxes and gabion mattresses shall be assembled, erected and filled with stones
in the dry on prepared surfaces except as may be otherwise approved. Approval for
assembling and erecting gabions in water shall be given only, if in the Engineer’s
opinion such a method will produce work which is otherwise in accordance with the
Specification.

SECTION 2400 RIVER TRAININGS AND PROTECTION WORKS Page 24-2

 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

(d) Preparation of Foundation and Surface for Bedding

The bed on which the gabion boxes or mattresses are to be laid shall be even and
conform to the levels shown on the Drawing. If necessary cavities between rock
protrusions shall be filled with material similar to that specified for gabion filling.
(e) Arrangement of Joints
(i) Walls
In walls gabion boxes shall be placed such that vertical joints are not continuous, but
staggered. Aprons shall be formed of headers. If more than one unit is required to obtain
the necessary width, unit of unequal length shall be used and the joints between should
be staggered.
(ii) Channel linings
In channel linings, gabion box and mattress units shall be laid so that the movement of
stone inside the mesh due to gravity or flow of water is avoided. Hence, on side slopes,
unit shall be placed with their internal diaphragms at right angles to the direction of the
slope and, on inverts, as far as possible, at right angles to the direction of flow.
(f) Assembly
Gabion boxes and gabion mattresses shall be assembled on a hard flat surface. After
fabrication, unpacking or unfolding, they shall be stretched out and any kinks shall be
removed. Creases shall be in the correct position for forming the boxes or mattress
compartments. The side and end panels shall be folded into an upright position to form
rectangular boxes or compartments. The top corners shall be joined together with the
thick selvedge wires sticking out of the corners of each panel. The tops of all sides and
partitions shall be leveled except as may be appropriate to special units. The sides and
end panels shall be tied together using binding wire of the thickness given in Table 24.1
/ 24.4, starting at the top of the panel by looping the wire through the corner and
twisting the wire together. Binding shall continue by looping the wire through each
mesh and around both selvedges with three rounds which shall be joined tightly
together by twisting and the end shall be pocked inside the unit. The diaphragms shall
be secured in their correct positions by binding in the same way. The bindings wire
shall be fixed using 250 mm long nose fencing pliers or equivalent approved tools.
The gabion boxes and gabion mattresses shall be laid in such a manner that the hinges
of the lid will be on the lower side on slopes and on the outer side in walls.
Where mattresses are laid horizontally hinges shall not be placed on the downstream
side
i. Filling
Except in the case of sack gabions, the crates shall be placed in their final position
before filling commences. They shall be stretched to their full dimension and securely
pegged to the ground or wired to adjacent gabion before filling. The vertical corners
shall be kept square and to full dimension by inserting a steel bay of at least 20 mm
diameter at each vertical corner, maintaining it in the correct final position throughout
the filling process, and removing it when the crate is full. Before filling commences,
the selvedges of the crate shall be bound to the selvedges of adjacent crates with binding
wire. Where crates are being assembled in position in a wall the binding of the edges
of each crate n the assembly process and the binding together of adjacent crates shall

SECTION 2400 RIVER TRAININGS AND PROTECTION WORKS Page 24-3

 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

be carried out in the same operation.

Before filling with stone, gabion shall be anchored at one end or side and stretched
from the opposite end or side by inserting temporary bars and levering them forward.
The top and bottom shall be kept stretched by tensioning with tie wires attached to an
anchorage or equivalent approved method until the gabion has been filled. The gabions
shall be inspected at this stage but before filling with stone to ensure that the tie/wiring
has been properly carried out and the gabion boxes or gabion mattresses are not pulling
apart. Gabion boxes or gabion mattresses may be tensioned either singly or in the case
of a long straight structure by staining a number of units together using an approved
tensioning system.
The filling shall be carried out by placing individual stones into the gabion by hand in
courses in such a manner that the stones are bedded on each other and bonded as in dry
random rubble masonry as per Clause 2608. No loose stones shall be tipped into the
crate and the practice of coursing and bonding the outer layer and filling the interior
with unlaid stones shall not be permitted.
All the gabions exposed to outer surface shall be provided with bracing. All 1m deep
gabions shall be filled in three equal layers and 0.5 m deep gabions in two equal layers.
Horizontal bracing wires made with the same bindings wire as used for tying shall be
fixed directly above each layer of the stone in the compartments, the wires being looped
round two adjoining meshes in each side of the compartment and joined together to
form a double tie which shall be tensioned by wind lacing together to keep the face of
the gabions even and free from bulges. Bracing wires shall be spaced horizontally along
and across the gabions at distances not greater than 0.5 m. Where the upper faces of
gabion boxes are not covered with further gabions vertical bracing wires shall be fitted
between the top and bottom mesh using two tie wires per square metre of surface.
The ties shall be fixed to the bottom of the units prior to filling and tied down to the lid
on completion. Where a double layer of gabion boxes is used to form an apron both
upper and lower layers shall have vertical tie wires.
ii. Securing Lids
The gabion boxes and mattress compartment shall be over filled by 50 mm above their
tops to allow for subsequent settlement. The lids shall then be tied down with binding
wire to the tops of all partition panels. The lids shall be stretched to fit the sides exactly
by means of suitable tool but due care shall be taken to ensure that the gabions are not
so full that the lids are overstretched. The corners shall be temporarily secured first.
(4) Test and Standard of Acceptance
(a) The gabion wire shall be tested for mass, uniformity and adhesion of zinc coating
and tensile strength of the wire itself. Failure of test results to comply with the
specifications shall lead to the rejection of gabion wires. The test on the samples
taken as per Table 24.2 from each lot of the G.I. wire received at the side of the
work shall be carried out in accordance with NS 163-258.

Table 24.2: Scale of Sampling and Permissible Number of Defective

No. of coils in a lot No. of coils randomly Permissible no. of

SECTION 2400 RIVER TRAININGS AND PROTECTION WORKS Page 24-4

 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

selected for sampling* defective coil

**Upto 25 0
26-50 3 0
51-150 5 0
151-300 8 1
300 and above 13 1

* One sample per coil shall be tested in all respect

** Up to 25 No of coils the contractor shall submit the manufacture’s certificate complying
the required specification to the Engineer.
(b) The stones shall be tested for specific gravity and water absorption. At least 3 set
of tests shall be made for every source of material. The test results shall meet the
specified criteria.
(5) Measurement
Gabion wire mesh for boxes and mattresses shall be measured in sq. metre. The boxes
and mattresses shall be physically measured and be verified with their tolerances.
The binding wires, selvedge wire and tension wires shall not be measured separately.
They are deemed included in the measurement of the gabion boxes and/or mattresses.
Stone filling in gabions including fixing of gabion in position, tying with binding wires
and tension wires as specified shall be measured in cu.m.
(6) Payment
Gabion boxes, gabion mattresses, stone filling shall be paid as per respective contract
unit rate which shall be the full and the final compensation to the Contractor as per
Clause 112 to complete the work in accordance with these Specifications.
2402. MECHANICALLY WOVEN CRATES (GABIONS AND MATTRESS)
(1) Scope
This specification covers mechanically woven, mechanically selvedge gabions and
Reno mattresses produced from double twist wire mesh used for manufacturing,
assembling and installation of the product.
This specification covers gabions and Reno mattresses in which the mesh wire, lacing
wire and the selvedge wire are (1) Zn coated (2) Zn - Al alloy coated (3) Zn + PVC
(Poly Vinyl Chloride) coated (4) Zn - Al alloy + PVC coated (5) Zn - Al alloy + PA 6
coated.
Gabions and mattresses shall be manufactured with all components mechanically
connected at the production facility. The front, base, back and lid of the gabions shall
be woven into a single unit. The diaphragms shall be factory connected to the base. The
lid of the Reno mattresses may be a separate piece made of same type of mesh as the
basket.

(2) Terminology

SECTION 2400 RIVER TRAININGS AND PROTECTION WORKS Page 24-5

 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Double twisted wire mesh: a non-raveling mesh made by twisting continuous pairs of
wires through three one-half turns (commonly called double-twisted) as shown in fig
24.1, to form hexagonal shaped openings which are then interconnected to adjacent
wires to form hexagonal openings.
Gabion: Gabions (figure 24.2) are boxes made of hexagonal double twisted woven
wire mesh, divided into cells by means of diaphragms which help to reinforce and
strengthen the structures. They are interconnected with other similar units and filled
with stones at the project site to form flexible, permeable and monolithic structures
such as gravity retaining walls, channel linings, weirs etc.

Fig. 24.2 Gabion Box

Jumbo Gabion: Jumbo Gabion is a special form of gabion with width 1.5 m or 2 m
made of hexagonal double twisted woven wire mesh, divided into cells by means of
diaphragms which help to reinforce and strengthen the structures. They are
interconnected with other similar units and filled with stones at the project site to form
flexible, permeable and monolithic structures such as gravity retaining walls, channel
linings, weirs etc.
Reno Mattresses: Reno mattress (figure 24.3) is a special form of gabion with large
plan area / thickness ratio, uniformly partitioned into internal cells by means of
diaphragms and having smaller mesh openings than the mesh used for gabions. Reno
mattresses are generally used in river training works such as river bank protection,
channel lining, launching apron etc.

SECTION 2400 RIVER TRAININGS AND PROTECTION WORKS Page 24-6

 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Fig. 24.3 Reno Mattress

Selvedge Wire: a terminal wire used to edge the cut portion of wire mesh panel
perpendicular to the double twist by mechanically wrapping the mesh wires around it
(Fig 24.5).

Fig. 24. 4 Mechanically Selvedging and Edge Wire

Main Body: All edges of the standard gabions should be mechanically selvedged
(Figure 24.5) in such a way as to prevent unraveling of the mesh and to develop the full
strength of the mesh.

SECTION 2400 RIVER TRAININGS AND PROTECTION WORKS Page 24-7

 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Fig 24.5 Components of Gabions

End panels and internal diaphragms: All sides of end panels and internal
diaphragms, except the bottom, should be mechanically selvedged (Figure 24. 4) in
such a way as to prevent unraveling of the mesh and to develop the full strength of the
mesh.
Edge Wire: a terminal wire of the same diameter as the selvedge wire used to edge the
wire mesh parallel to the double twist by continuously weaving it mechanically into
the wire mesh (Fig 24.4).
Lacing Wire: a wire with the same coating as per mesh wire used to assemble and
interconnect empty units to close and secure stone-filled units and for internal
stiffeners.
Diaphragm: an internal partition made of same double twisted wire mesh panel in a
gabion / Reno mattress that is attached to the bottom, the sides, and, after the gabion
cage is packed with stones, to the lid of the cage (Fig 24.2 and 24. 3).
Connection of end panels to main body: The end panels in Box gabions should
be mechanically connected with the main body at the manufacturing site by Selvedging
the both to a common selvedge wire in such a way to prevent the separation of the end
panel from main body even in extreme conditions (Figure 24.2). In Reno mattresses,
the end panels are manufactured together with the main body and are folded at
manufacturing site to form the end panels
(3) Mesh and Box Characteristics
Mesh types and shapes shall be as given in Table 24.3. The mesh and Box
characteristics of Gabions and Reno Mattresses are given Table 24.4 and 24.5.

SECTION 2400 RIVER TRAININGS AND PROTECTION WORKS Page 24-8

 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Table 24.3 Mesh types and size

Mesh type ‘D’ Nominal Size, mm Tolerances
10 x 12 100
8 x 10 80 + 16% to – 4%
6x8 60

Table 24.4 (A) – Mesh & box characteristics for Gabions

Mesh Type 10 x 12
‘D’, mm 100
Wire Type Zn Coated Zn – Al alloy Coated Zn + PVC Zn – Al
Coated alloy + PA6
Coated
Mesh Wire Dia.,
2.70 3.00 2.70 3.00 2.70/3.70* 2.70/3.70*
mm
Edge / Selvedge
3.40 3.90 3.40 3.90 3.40/4.40* 3.40/4.40*
wire Dia., mm
Lacing wire dia,
2.20 2.40 2.20 2.40 2.20/3.20 2.20/3.20
mm
Nominal – Nominal –
PVC / PA6 coating 0.50 0.50
N. A N. A
thickness, mm Minimum – Minimum –
0.38 0.38

Box Gabions:
Typical Sizes 4 x 1 x 1 / 3 Nos, 3 x 1 x 1 / 2 Nos, 2 x 1 x 1 / 1 No, 1.5 x 1 x 1 / 0 No,
2 x 1 x 0.5 / 1 No , 3 x 1 x 0.5 / 2 Nos, 4 x 1 x 0.5 / 3 Nos,
Length x Width x Jumbo Gabions:
Height (m) / 5 x 1.5 x 1 / 4 Nos, 4 x 1.5 x 1 / 3 Nos, 3 x 1.5 x 1 / 2 No,
Number of 5 x 2 x 1 / 4 Nos, 4 x 2 x 1 / 3 Nos, 3 x 2 x 1 / 2 No
diaphragms 5 x 1.5 x 0.5 / 4 Nos, 4 x 1.5 x 0.5 / 3 Nos, 3 x 1.5 x 0.5 / 2 No,
5 x 2 x 0.5 / 4 Nos, 4 x 2 x 0.5 / 3 Nos, 3 x 2 x 0.5 / 2 No
Tolerances in Size
Length & Width... ± 5%: Height ± 5%
of Gabion Boxes

Table 24.4 (B) – Mesh & box characteristics for Gabions

Mesh Type 8 x 10
‘D’, mm 80
Wire Type Zn Coated Zn – Al alloy Zn + PVC Zn – Al alloy +
Coated Coated PA6 Coated
Mesh Wire Dia., mm 2.70 3.00 2.70 3.00 2.70/3.70* 2.70/3.70*

Edge / Selvedge wire

3.40 3.90 3.40 3.90 3.40/4.40* 3.40/4.40*
Dia., mm

Lacing wire dia, mm 2.20 2.40 2.20 2.40 2.20/3.20 2.20/3.20

Nominal – 0.50 Nominal – 0.50

PVC / PA6 coating
N. A N. A Minimum – Minimum –
thickness, mm
0.38 0.38

SECTION 2400 RIVER TRAININGS AND PROTECTION WORKS Page 24-9

 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Table 24.4 (B) – Mesh & box characteristics for Gabions

Mesh Type 8 x 10
‘D’, mm 80
Wire Type Zn Coated Zn – Al alloy Zn + PVC Zn – Al alloy +
Coated Coated PA6 Coated
Typical Sizes
4 x 1 x 1 / 3 Nos, 3 x 1 x 1 / 2 Nos, 2 x 1 x 1 / 1 No, 1.5 x 1 x 1 / 0 No,
Length x Width x 2 x 1 x 0.5 / 1 No , 3 x 1 x 0.5 / 2 Nos, 4 x 1 x 0.5 / 3 Nos,
Height (m) / Number 2 x 1 x 0.3 / 1 No, 3 x 1 x 0.3 / 2 Nos, 4 x 1 x 0.3 / 3 Nos
of diaphragms

Tolerances in Size of
Length & Width... ± 5%: Height ± 5%
Gabion Boxes

Table 24.4 (C) – Mesh & box characteristics for Reno Mattresses
Mesh Type 6x8
‘D’, mm 60
Wire Type Zn Coated Zn – Al alloy Zn + PVC Zn – Al alloy +
Coated Coated PA6 Coated
Mesh Wire Dia., mm 2.20 2.20 2.20/3.20* 2.20/3.20*
Edge / Selvedge wire
2.70 2.70 2.70/3.70* 2.70/3.70*
Dia., mm
Lacing wire dia, mm 2.20 2.20 2.20/3.20 2.20/3.20
Nominal –
0.50 Nominal – 0.50
PVC / PA6 coating
N. A N. A
thickness, mm
Minimum – Minimum – 0.38
0.38

Typical Sizes 6 x 2 x 0.17 / 5 Nos, 5 x 2 x 0.17 / 4 Nos, 4 x 2 x 0.17 / 3 Nos, 3 x 2 x

0.17 / 2 Nos
6 x 2 x 0.23 / 5 Nos, 5 x 2 x 0.23 / 3 Nos, 4 x 2 x 0.23 / 3 Nos, 3 x 2 x
Length x Width x 0.23 / 2 Nos
Height (m) / Number 6 x 2 x 0.30 / 5 Nos, 5 x 2 x 0.30 / 4 Nos, 4 x 2 x 0.30 / 3 Nos, 3 x 2 x
of diaphragms 0.30 / 2 Nos
Tolerances in Size of
Length & Width... ± 5%: Height ± 10%
Gabion Boxes

- Internal Diameter / External diameter of PVC or PA 6 coated wire

- Only standard sizes of Reno Mattresses are indicated in the table above. Special
sizes can also be applied as per instruction of the Engineer.
The Zn coating shall be heavy coating for soft condition conforming to NS 163 and
Zn–Al alloy coatings shall be in conformance with EN 10244-2. For corrosive
environment, an additional PVC coating (as per ASTM A 975-2011 or PA6 coating (as
per EN 10223-3) of 0.5 mm thick shall be provided over the Zn or Zinc-Al alloy
coatings.

SECTION 2400 RIVER TRAININGS AND PROTECTION WORKS Page 24-10

 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

(4) Mechanical Properties

Where mesh and connection strength is specified, the minimum strength requirements
of the mesh when tested in accordance with Clause no. 2402 (6) shall be as shown in
Table 24.5
Table 24.5 –Minimum Strength Requirements of Mesh and Connections
Mesh Type 10 x 12 8 x 10 6x8
Zn or Zn or Zn or
Zn or Zn or Zn- AL Zn or Zn- AL Zn or Zn- AL
Characteristics Zn- AL Zn- AL alloy Zn- AL alloy Zn- AL alloy
alloy alloy +PVC alloy +PVC alloy +PVC
or PA6 or PA6 or PA6
Mesh Wire Dia.
2.7 3.0 2.7 3.0 2.7 2.2 2.2
(mm)
Parallel to twist
36.0 46.0 36.0 55. 45. 36 36
(kN/m)
Perpendicular to
18 22 18 26 20 18 18
twist (kN/m)
Selvedge
18 20 18 20 18 11 11
Strength (kN/m)
Panel to Panel
Connection using
10 11 10 20 16 11 11
lacing wire or
fasteners (kN/m)
Punch Test (kN) 20 22 20 27 22 20 20

(5) Physical Properties

(i) Mass and adhesion of Zinc Coating
The coating weights shall conform to the requirements of NS: 163/ IS:4826 Heavily
Coated and soft type as shown in Table 24.6 . The zinc coating shall remain adherent
to the steel wire and conform to such that zinc coating does not flake off, nor crack to
such an extent that there is possibility of removing any zinc by rubbing with bare
fingers
Table 24.6 Minimum Mass of Zinc Coating and Permitted tolerances on galvanized
steel wire diameters
Nominal Diameter of Mass of Zinc coating, g/m2 Permitted tolerances (+/-) on
Galvanized wire, mm wire diameters ,mm
2.00 240 0.05
2.20 240 0.06
2.40 260 0.06
2.70 260 0.07
3.00 270 0.08
3.40 270 0.09
3.90 280 0.10

Uniformity: The coating on the wire shall be reasonably uniform as judge by the
copper sulphate solution dip test. Number of dips shall be as per the table below:

SECTION 2400 RIVER TRAININGS AND PROTECTION WORKS Page 24-11

 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Uniformity of zinc coating:

Diameter of wire (mm) 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.70 3.00 3.40 3.90

Nos. of dips (minutes) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Uniformity

Test Nos. of dips (1/2 minute) - - - 1 1 1 1

Adhesion: The adhesion of the zinc coating shall be such that, when the wire is
wrapped six turns around a mandrel of 4 times the diameter of the wire, it does not
flake or crack to such an extent that any flakes of zinc can be removed by rubbing with
the bare fingers.
Tensile Strength
The tensile strength of wire used for double-twisted mesh, lacing wire, and stiffener,
when tested shall be in accordance with the requirements of IS 280 for soft wire
(350-550 MPa) at a minimum elongation of 10 percent, performed on a gauge
length of test specimen as 200 mm.
(ii) PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) Coating
The initial properties of PVC coating material shall have a demonstrated ability to
conform to the following requirements
Specific Gravity
In the range from 1.30 to 1.35 when tested in accordance with Test Method IS 13360:
Part 3: Sec 1.
Tensile Strength
Not less than 20.6 MPa when tested in accordance with Test Method IS: 13360: Part 5:
Sec 1
Hardness
Shore “D” between 50 and 60, when tested in accordance with Test Method IS: 13360:
Part 5: Sec 11
Zn-Al alloy coating
 Zn-Al alloy coating: Minimum quantities of Zn-Al alloy shall be as shown in table
24.7
 Adhesion of Zn-Al alloy coating: The adhesion of the Zn-Al alloy coating to the
wire shall be such that, when the wire is wrapped six turns around a mandrel having
four times the diameter of the wire, it does not flake or crack when rubbing it with
the bare fingers in accordance with and IS: 4826

SECTION 2400 RIVER TRAININGS AND PROTECTION WORKS Page 24-12

 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Table 24.7 Minimum Mass of Zn-Al Coating

Wire Diameter mm 2.2 2.4 2.7 3.0 3.4 3.9

mm mm mm mm mm mm

Wire 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.07 0.07 0.07

Tolerance(+)mm

Minimum Qty of Zn+ 230 230 245 255 265 275

10% Al alloy (gm/m2 )

(6) Test and standard of acceptance

Tensile Strength of Wire Mesh Panel– The wire mesh specimens shall be
representative of proper field construction as to materials, mesh geometry, and
workmanship, and shall be as large as practical to minimize the effect of variations.
The tests shall be run with the load applied parallel to the axis of the twist and repeated
on a separate test specimen with the load applied perpendicular to the axis of the twist.
The mesh shall be placed into the machine grips such that the gripped mesh will be
maintained in the mesh geometry characteristic of field use. The specimen of
approximately 0.8m width and 0.5m height shall be tested. The effective width to be
considered for test specimen shall be the distance between two extreme gripping points.
The specimen should extend by at least one mesh repetition beyond the extreme
gripping points on either side. However, specimen should not extend more than two
mesh repetitions beyond extreme gripping points. The mesh shall be pre-loaded to 10%
of the specified minimum strength and machine head travel stopped. The mesh gauge
dimensions shall be recorded at this time and taken as the initial dimensions of the
specimen where such dimensions are required. If the sample slips at any of the gripping
point during the test, such a test shall be discarded and a new sample shall be taken.
The loading shall then continue uniformly maintaining the displacement rate of 75 to
100mm per minute until first fracture or unwrapping of an individual wire in the system
occurs. The distortion of the mesh or changes in gauge length shall be measured to
accuracy consistent with reporting the percent elongation to the nearest 0.5 %.
Pull-Apart Resistance Test: Where Pull-aprt resistance test is specified, the test
procedure for performing the pull-apart resistance test shall be in accordance with the
test procedure as per Clause 13.1.2 of ASTM A975-11.
Metallic Coating Weight – Perform coating weight tests and adhesion tests shall be
performed in conformity with IS: 4826.
PVC Coating- The thickness and other parameter of the PVC coating shall be measured
in accordance with IS: 16014.
(7) Construction
i. General Requirements
Clause 2401 (2) (c ) shall apply

SECTION 2400 RIVER TRAININGS AND PROTECTION WORKS Page 24-13

 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

ii. Preparation of Foundation and surface bedding

Clause 2401 (2) (d ) shall apply
iii. Arrangements of Joints
Clause 2401 (2) (e ) shall apply
iv. Assembly
Clause 2401 (2) (f ) shall apply
v. Filling
Clause 2401 (2) (g ) shall apply
vi. Securing Lids
Clause 2401 (2) (h ) shall apply
(8) Measurement
Mechanically woven Gabion wire mesh and mattresses shall be measured in sq. metre.
The boxes and mattresses shall be physically measured and be verified with their
tolerances.
Stone filling in gabions including fixing of gabion in position, tying with binding wires
and tension wires as specified shall be measured in cu ft.
(9) Payment
Mechanically woven Gabion wire mesh, gabion mattresses, stone filling shall be paid
as per respective contract unit rate which shall be the full and the final compensation
to the Contractor as per Clause 112 to complete the work in accordance with these
Specifications.

gullies. Fill material for such purpose shall consist of suitable material as defined in
Clause 902 and shall be deposited and compacted by approved plant as defined in
Clause 910, in accordance with the lines, levels and grades shown on the Drawing and
as directed by the Engineer.

SECTION 2400 RIVER TRAININGS AND PROTECTION WORKS Page 24-14

 SECTION 2600: MASONRY FOR STRUCTURES Page No.

2601 SCOPE...................................................................................................................... 26-1

2602 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................... 26-1

2603 CONSTRUCTION .................................................................................................. 26-1

2604 ASHLAR .................................................................................................................. 26-3

2605 BLOCK-IN-COURSE ............................................................................................. 26-3

2606 SQUARE RUBBLE-COURSED OR BROKEN COURSE ................................. 26-3

2607 RANDOM RUBBLE-COURSED OR UNCOURSED ......................................... 26-3

2608 DRY RANDOM RUBBLE ..................................................................................... 26-4

2609 COMPOSITE RANDOM RUBBLE...................................................................... 26-4

2610 TEST AND STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE..................................................... 26-4

2611 MEASUREMENT ................................................................................................... 26-4

2612 PAYMENT ............................................................................................................... 26-4

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

SECTION 2600: MASONRY FOR STRUCTURES

2601 SCOPE
This Section covers the furnishing of materials and construction of different types of stone
masonry works in accordance with the Drawing and this Specifications or as directed by
the Engineer.
2602 MATERIALS
(1) Stone
The stones to be used shall be durable and angular in shape. If boulders are used, they shall
be broken into angular pieces. The stones shall be sound, hard, free from iron bands, spots,
sand holes, flaws, shakes, cracks or other defects. The stone shall not absorb water more
than 5 per cent. The specific gravity of the stone shall not be less than 2.50. Except otherwise
described in the contract, the length of any stone shall not exceed three times its height. The
breadth of the stone on the bed shall not be less than 150 mm nor greater than 3/4 the
thickness of the wall. At least 85% of the stones used in masonry, except those used for
chinking as chips or spalls of stones shall have individual volumes of more than 0.01 m 3.
The chips or spalls used including voids in the dry stone masonry shall not be more than
20% of the stone masonry by volume. In case of mortared masonry, the total volume of
mortar and spalls taken together shall not be more than 30% of the mortared masonry.
Representative samples of the stones intended for use in the works shall be submitted to the
Engineer for prior approval. Further representative samples shall be submitted for approval
whenever there is a change in the type or strength of the rock that the Contractor intends to
use in masonry work.
(2) Mortar
Mortar for masonry shall conform to Sub-clause 2502 (2).
2603 CONSTRUCTION
The method of construction described herein shall hold in all Clauses of this Section,
wherever applicable.
(1) General
Construction shall be carried out in accordance with I.S. 1597-1992, Code of Practice for
construction of stone masonry, Part 1 Rubble stone masonry or Part 2 Ashlar Masonry as
appropriate. All stratified stone possessing bedding planes shall be laid with its natural bed
as nearly as possible at right angles to the direction of load. In the case of arch rings, the
natural bed shall be radial. Face work groins shall be built to a height not exceeding one
meter in advance of the main body of the work and adjacent walling stepped down on either
side. Masonry face work between the groins shall then be built to a height not exceeding
500 mm above the backing which shall then be brought up level with the completed face
work. At no time shall the backing be built up higher than the face work.

SECTION 2600 MASONRY FOR STRUCTURES Page 26-1

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Except for dry rubble walling, all joints (gaps) shall be sufficiently thick to prevent stone to
stone contact and the gaps shall be completely filled with mortar. Stones shall be clean and
sufficiently wetted before laying to prevent absorption of water from mortar.
Placing loose mortar on the course and pouring water upon it to fill the gaps in stones shall
not be allowed. Mortar shall be fluid, mixed thoroughly and then poured in the joints. No
dry or hollow space shall be left anywhere in the masonry and each stone shall have all its
faces completely covered with mortar of the thickness as specified for joints.
The bed which is to receive the stone shall be cleaned, wetted and covered with a layer of
fresh mortar. All stones shall be laid full in mortar both in bed and vertical joints and settled
carefully in place with a wooden mallet immediately after placement and solidly embedded
in mortar before it has set. Clean and wet chips and spalls shall be wedged into the mortar
joints and bed whenever necessary to avoid thick joints or bed of mortar. When the
foundation masonry is laid directly on rock, the bedding face of the stones of the first course
shall be dressed to fit into rock snugly when pressed down in the mortar bedding over the
rock. For masonry works over rock, a levelling course of M15/40 or M15/20 concrete
100mm thickness shall be laid over rock and then stone masonry work shall be laid without
foundation concrete block.
In case, any stone already set in mortar is disturbed or the joints broken, it shall be taken out
without disturbing the adjoining stones and joints. Dry mortar and stones thoroughly cleaned
from the joints and the stones shall be reset in fresh mortar. Sliding one stone on top of
another which is freshly laid, shall not be allowed.
Shaping and dressing of stone shall be done before it is laid in the work. Dressing and
hammering of the laid stones which will loosen the masonry, shall not be allowed.
Building up face wall tied with occasional through stones and filling up the middle with
stones spalls and chips or dry packing shall not be allowed. Vertical joints shall be staggered.
Distance between the nearer vertical joints of upper layer and lower layer in coursed rubble
masonry shall not be less than half the height of the course.
Masonry in a structure between two expansion joints shall be carried up nearly at one
uniform level throughout but when breaks are unavoidable the masonry shall be raked in
sufficiently long steps to facilitate jointing of old and new work. The stepping of raking
shall not be more than 45 degrees with the horizontal.
Masonry shall not be laid when the air temperature in the shade is less than 3°C. Newly laid
masonry shall be protected from the harmful effects of weather.
(2) Concreting Capping
Where masonry structures are to receive a concrete capping. The joints to the upper surface
of the masonry shall be raked out to a depth of 10 mm prior to placing of the concrete to the
capping. The concrete for capping shall be as per the Drawing or as directed by Engineer
and shall conform to Section 2000.
(3) Pointing
Where external faces of the mortared masonry work will be backfilled or otherwise

SECTION 2600 MASONRY FOR STRUCTURES Page 26-2

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

permanently covered up, the mortared joint shall be finished flush to the faces of the adjacent
stonework.
Where mortared masonry faces will remain exposed, the mortar joints shall be pointed to a
consistent style as shown on the Drawing. Pointing shall be carried out using mortar 1:3 by
volume of cement and sand or as shown on the Drawing. The mortar shall be filled and
pressed into the raked out joints before giving the required finish. The pointing, if not
otherwise mentioned shall be ruled type for which it shall, while masonry work is still green,
be ruled along the centre with half round tools of such width as may be specified by the
engineer. The excess mortar shall then, be taken off from the edges of the lines and shall not
be unnecessarily plastered over the exposed stone works. The thickness of the joints shall
not be less than 3mm for Ashlar masonry.
However, the maximum thickness of joints in different works shall be as follows:
Random Rubble: 20 mm
Coursed Rubble: 15 mm
Ashlar masonry: 5 mm
2604 ASHLAR
All stones shall be dressed to accurate planes on the beds and joints and they shall be fair
and neatly or fine tooled on the face unless otherwise described in the contract.
2605 BLOCK-IN-COURSE
Beds and joints shall be squared and dressed for a distance of at least 220 mm from the
exposed face. Bond stones shall form at least one sixth of the area of the exposed face and
shall extend at least 900 mm into the wall or for the full thickness of the wall if the latter is
less than 900 mm. Unless described in the contract as tooled or drafted, the exposed face of
all stones shall be blocked and left rough. Arises shall be dressed square at all beds and
joints.
2606 SQUARE RUBBLE-COURSED OR BROKEN COURSE
All stones shall be truly squared and dressed for a distance at least 120 mm from the face of
the wall. Bond stones shall be provided at the rate of at least one to every 0.8 m2 of exposed
face and shall measure not less than 150 mm x 150 mm on the face and not less than 450
mm in length or the full thickness of the wall, whichever is the less. Vertical joints in any
layer shall be broken in the next layer and the horizontal lapping of the stones shall not be
less than 100 mm.
2607 RANDOM RUBBLE-COURSED OR UNCOURSED
All stones shall be carefully set with a bond stone provided at the rate of at least one to every
0.9 m2 of exposed face. Bond stones shall measure not less than 150 mm x 150 mm on the
exposed face and not less than 450 mm in length or the full thickness of the wall, whichever
is the less.

SECTION 2600 MASONRY FOR STRUCTURES Page 26-3

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

2608 DRY RANDOM RUBBLE

Dry random rubble masonry shall be constructed generally to the requirements of coursed
random rubble masonry as specified in Clause 2607 but with the omission of mortar. All
stones shall be carefully shaped to obtain as close a fit as possible at all beds and joints,
any interstices between the stones being filled with selected stone spalls. The stones in
courses shall be laid perpendicular to the batter face. The exposed tops or capings of dry
rubble structures shall be formed as shown on the Drawing.
2609 COMPOSITE RANDOM RUBBLE
Materials for composite random rubble shall comply with Clause 2602 and construction
with Clause 2603. Mortar masonry shall be coursed and comply with Clause 2607 and the
dry stone insets with Clause 2608. The dry stone insets shall be constructed when the level
of the surrounding mortared masonry surround has reached the top of the dry stone inset.
2610 TEST AND STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE
Before laying any mortar, the Contractor shall make three sets of mortar test cubes from
each source of sand to demonstrate the compliance of the mix to the specified strength. Each
set shall comprise two cubes, one to be tested at 7 days and the other to be tested at 28 days.
During construction, the Contractor shall make and test mortar cubes at the rate of three
cubes for every 10m3 of masonry to assess the strength subject to a minimum of 3 cubes
samples for a day’s work. Testing of cubes shall be in accordance with IS: 2250. The stones
shall be tested for the water absorption as per IS: 1124 and it shall not be more than 5
percent. The stones shall also be tested for Specification gravity and it shall not be less than
2.65. Sand shall be tested as per Clause 613 or as directed by the Engineer. At least 3 set of
tests for stone and sand shall be conducted for every source.
2611 MEASUREMENT
Stone masonry shall be measured in cubic metres. The pointing shall be measured in sq. m.
2612 PAYMENT
The stone masonry and the pointing shall be paid at the respective contract unit prices which
shall be the full and the final compensation to the Contractor as per Clause 112.

SECTION 2600 MASONRY FOR STRUCTURES Page 26-4

 SECTION 2800- BIO ENGINEERING WORKS

Page No.

2801 SCOPE........................................................................................................................ 281

2802 PROVISION OF SEEDS .........................................................................................28-1

2803 PROVISION OF PLANT CUTTINGS ..................................................................28-3

2804 NURSERY CONSTRUCTION ...............................................................................28-8

2805 NURSERY OPERATION AND MANAGEMENT ................................................. 11

2806 FINAL SLOPE PREPARATION FOR BI0-ENGINEERING ............................... 15

2807 SITE PLANTING AND SOWING ............................................................................ 17

2808 JUTE NETTING WORKS ......................................................................................... 29

2809 GABION WIRE BOLSTERS, SUB-SOIL DRAINS AND WIRE NETTING ...... 32

2810 SITE PROTECTION .................................................................................................. 35

2811 SITE AFTERCARE AND MAINTENANCE........................................................... 38

2812 TURFING WITH SODS............................................................................................. 39

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

SECTION 2800: Bio Engineering Works

2801 SCOPE
This Section covers all component of bio-engineering works such as provision of seed and
plant cutting, nursery construction and operation, slope preparation for planning, site
planting and sowing, jute netting, gabion wire bolsters and wire bolsters and wire netting,
site protection and aftercare/maintenance.
2802 PROVISION OF SEEDS
The Contractor shall provide or collect seeds of the required species and quantities in
accordance with the requirements described hereafter, as and when required. He shall supply
all necessary expertise, resources and facilities to ensure that these requirements are met in
full. It shall be ensured that the seed is of a high quality.
The Engineer shall give indications as to the expected amounts of seeds required and the
time of availability. But it shall be the Contractor responsibility to ensure that adequate
quantities of seeds are obtained in a timely manner.
The weight to be specified shall be for sun -dried seeds separated completely from fruiting
bodies and other unwanted parts, and ready for storage and subsequent sowing. There is
usually large discrepancy between this weight and that of the freshly collected, untreated
fruits.
Should the Contractor be unable to supply the specified seeds, the advice of the Engineer
should be sought. The Engineer may approve other substitute species, if found appropriate.
Seed shall not be obtained commercially without the Engineer’s written authority.
(1) Grass Seed Collection
(a) The species of grass seeds to be collected shall be determined by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall be responsible for determining seed sources, through these
may be specified by the Engineer’s instructions. Seeds shall be collected in or
very close to the office of use or the project area as much as possible.
(b) If the Engineer does not specify the species, then the current approved list of bio-
engineering plants, as determined by the Geo-Environment and Social Unit of
the Department of Roads shall be referred to.
(c) Seeds shall be collected from as many individual plants as possible. Seeds shall
be collected from the largest and most vigorous plants.
(d) The Contractor shall under no circumstances damages or remove the roots of
grass plants while collecting seed. The Contractor shall be responsible for safety
measures and for making all necessary arrangements with landowners, farmers
and the local District Forest Office, as applicable, before the collection of seeds.
(e) Seeds shall only be collected when fully ripe. Seeds collected early shall not be
accepted. The Contractor shall be held liable if the germination rate of seeds is
lower than 70%.

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-1

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

(f) Immediately after collection, seeds shall be separated from flower heads by the
method normally used by farmers for other grasses. Once separated, the seeds
shall be sun-dried before storage.
(g) Seeds shall be stored in a cool, dry, ventilated building with adequate precautions
taken against pests. Containers shall be raised above the floor. They shall not be
kept in the same building in which materials like cement, or any chemicals, fuels
or lubricants are stored. Grass shall be stored in bags made of cotton. Seeds shall
be carefully inspected on a weekly basis to ensure that there is no deterioration
or mould formation, or pest attack. Seeds shall only be stored after they have
been properly dried in the sun beforehand.
(h) Measurement and Payment: Works shall be measured on the basis of actual
quantity collected, weighed in Kilogram and accepted by the Engineer. The
quantities thus measured shall be paid at the unit rates shown in the Bill of
Quantities. Such payment shall be the full and the final compensation to the
Contractor for making arrangements of collection location, provision of safety
measures, collection of seeds, separation of seeds, preparation of seeds, sun
drying, packing and providing the seeds as per these Specifications.
(2) Tree and Shrub Seed Collection
(a) The species of tree and shrub to be collected shall be determined by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall be responsible for determining seed sources, though these
may be specified by the Engineer’s instructions. Seeds shall normally be
collected in or very close to the working area.
(b) If the Engineer does not specify the species, then the current approved list of bio-
engineering plant, as determined by the Geo-Environment and Social Unit of
Department of Roads shall be referred to.
(c) Seeds shall be collected from as many individual plants as possible. If any event,
they shall be collected from at least ten individual plant. The plants from which
the seeds are collected shall show vigorous growth and good form. Mis-shaven
and stunted plants shall be discarded.
(d) The Contractor shall under no circumstances damage plants while collecting
seed. The Contractor shall be responsible for making all necessary arrangements
with and owners, farmers and the local District Forest Office, as applicable,
before the collection of seeds.
(e) Appropriately trained personnel with appropriate equipment shall be employed
while collecting the seeds. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure
safe working conditions for his employees or Sub-contractors.
(f) Seeds shall only be collected when fully ripe. Seeds collected early shall not be
accepted. The Contractor shall be held liable if the germination rate of seeds is
lower than 80%.
(g) Immediately after collection, seeds shall be separated from fruit by the method

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-2

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

normally used by farmers and foresters for this purpose; this shall depend on the
individual species. Once separated, the seeds shall be sun-dried before storage.
(h) Seeds shall be stored in a cool, dry, ventilated building with adequate precautions
taken against pests. Containers shall be raised above the floor. They shall not be
kept in the same building in which materials like cement, or any chemicals, fuels
or lubricants are stored. If kept in sealed containers, the seeds shall be carefully
inspected on a weekly basis to ensure that there is no deterioration or mould
formation or pest attack. Seeds shall only be stored after they have been properly
dried in the sun beforehand.
(i) Measurement and payment: works shall be measured on the basis of actual
quantity collected, accepted and weighed in Kilogram. The quantities thus
measured shall be paid at the unit rates shown in the Bill of Quantities. Such
payment shall be the full and the final compensation to the Contractor for making
arrangements of collection location, provision of safety measures, collection of
seeds, separation of seeds, preparation of seeds, sun drying, packing and
providing the seeds as per these Specifications.
2803 PROVISION OF PLANT CUTTINGS
Species of plants to be collected for vegetative propagation shall be determined by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining plant material sources,
through these may be specified by the Engineer’s instructions. Plants shall normally be
collected in or very close to the working area.
If the Engineer does not specify the species, then the current approved list to bio-engineering
plants, as determined by the Geo-Environment and Social Unit of the Department of Roads
shall be referred to.
(1) Provision of Grass Cutting
(a) Cuttings of various types shall be taken from grass species, which are known to
propagate.
(b) Cuttings shall be made from as many healthy individual plants as possible. The
plants from which the cuttings are taken shall show vigorous growth and good
form. Grass clumps showing stunted growth shall not be considered as sources.
(c) Apart from the clumps, which are dugs up to make cutting, the contractor shall
under no circumstances damage other plants. The Contractor shall be responsible
for making all necessary arrangements with landowners, farmers and the local
District Forest Office, as applicable before the making of hardwood cuttings.
(d) The type of cuttings to be made shall depend on the species and shall be as shown
in Table 28.1. If the species used is not listed here, then the latest technical
information provided by the Geo-Environment and Social Unit shall be
consulted. If the species is still not covered, then stem and root slip cuttings shall
be used.

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-3

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Table 28.1: Type of Grass Cutting

Local name Botanical Name Best Propagation Details
Stem: 100-150 mm; rhizome:
Amliso Thysanolaena maxima Rhizome cutting
50-80 mm
Stem: 100-150 mm; root: 20-
Babiyo Eulaliopsisbinata Slip cutting
40 mm
Rhizome cutting: - Stem:
100-150 mm: rhizome: 40:50
Rhizome/stem
Dhonde Neyraudiareynaudiana mm Stem cuttings: 2 nodes
cutting
plus 20 mm each sides

Sacccharum Stem: 100-150 mm; root: 30-

Kans Slip cutting
spontaneum 40 mm
Cymonpogon Stem: 100-150 mm; root: 30-
Khar Slip cutting
microtheca 40 mm
Stem: 100-150 mm; root: 30-
Khus Vetiverlowsonil Slip cutting
40 mm
Single node: - 1 node with 30-
40 mm top and 100-150 mm
Napier Pennisetumpurpureum Stem cutting bottom; Double nodes:- 2
nodes plus 30-40 mm each
sides
Single cutting: - 2 node plus
30-40 mm each sides Slips
Narkat Aruundoclonax Stem/Slip cutting
cuttings: - Stem: 100- 150
mm; root:30-40 mm each sides
Himalayacalamus Stem:750-1200 mm; rhizome:
Padang bans Rhizome
hookerianus 100-200 mm.
Stem:100-150 mm; rhizome:
Phurke Arunduellanepalensis Rhizome cutting
30-40 mm.
Stem:100-150 mm; rhizome:
Sito Neyraudiaarundinacea Rhizome cutting
30-60 mm.
Drepanostachyum Stem:50-1200 mm; rhizome:
Titenigalo Rhizome
intermedium 100-200 mm

(e) Where roots are required for the cuttings, grass clumps shall be carefully dug up.
They shall not be pulled hard so as to damage the material. They shall be
separated carefully by hand, using a sharp khukuri or knife where necessary.
There shall be no tearing of the plant fabric.
(f) Stem cutting shall be made using sharp secateurs or khukuri. The tip cut shall be
made at right angles to the stem and the bottom cut shall be made at 45o C to the
stem.
(g) Once cuttings have been made, they shall be wrapped in wet hessian jute
immediately. At all times, cuttings shall be kept moist and as cool as possible,
and shall be wrapped in wet hessian between all operations such as digging out
of the ground, splitting out, trimming and planting. If the hessian jute is not easily
available, the cuttings shall be covered with the thick blanket of off-cut part of
vegetation such as Titepati and Banmara. For this prior approval of the Engineer
shall be required. Under any circumstances, all cuttings shall be planted the same

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-4

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

day that they are made.

(e) Measurement and Payment: Measurement of grass cuttings shall be made
on the basis of actual numbers of slip or cutting prepared, counted on site
and accepted. The quantities thus measured shall be paid at the unit rate
shown in the Bill of Quantities. Such payment shall be the full and the final
compensation to the Contractor for all arrangements for uprooting of grass
clumps, collection of materials for cuttings and preparation and providing
the cuttings as per these Specifications.
(2) Provision of Hard wood cuttings
(a) Hardwood cuttings shall be taken from shrubs and trees species which are known
to propagate easily by vegetative means.
(b) Cuttings shall be made from as many healthy individual plants as possible. The
plants from which the cuttings are taken shall show vigorous growth and good
form. Mis- shaven and stunted plants shall not be considered as source.
(c) Apart from the branches from which cuttings are taken, the Contractor shall
under no circumstances damage plants while taking cuttings. The Contractor
shall be responsible for taking safety precautions and for making all necessary
arrangements with landowners, farmers and the local District Forest Office, as
applicable, before the making of hardwood cuttings.
(d) Hardwood cuttings shall be made from stems which are between 6 and 18
months old. Materials outside this range shall not be used. The Contractor shall
be held liable if the success rate of cuttings is lower than 70%.
(e) Hardwood cutting shall be made using sharp secateurs or a sharp saw. The top
cut shall be made at right angles to the stem and the bottom cut shall be made at
45° to the stem. Under no circumstances shall there be any damage to the bark
of the cutting.
(f) Hardwood cuttings, which are to be planted in the nursery for later
multiplication, shall be normally 150 to 200 mm in length and 20 to 30
a. in diameter. This size shall not be exceeded for the majority of species unless
specified or approved by the Engineer.
(g) Hardwood cuttings which are to be used in brush layering, palisades and live
stakes shall normally be 450 mm for brush layering on road embankments, 600
mm for brush layering on landslide debris, 600 mm for palisades and 20 to 40
mm in diameter. This length of cuttings shall not be exceeded for the majority
of species unless specified or approved by the Engineer.
(h) The size of cuttings shall be of a minimum length of 1000 mm and 50 mm of
diameter for fascines. All the small branches growing from the main branch shall
be preserved. Those small branches contain the first sprouting buds which will
help to keep alive the main branches as they are buried in the ground.

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-5

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

(i) A number of species can be propagated using large truncheon cuttings. In this
category fall chuletro (Brassaiopsishainla), dabdabe (Garugapinnata), kavro
(Ficuslacor), phaledo (Erythrina species) and Gliricidiasepium. Hardwood
cuttings for these species shall be in the range of 2000 to 2500 mm in length and
50 to 80 mm in diameter unless otherwise specified.
(j) All trunchen cuttings shall be covered with long mulch during transportation and
storage. Under any circumstances, all cuttings shall be planted within two days
that they are made.
(k) Measurement and Payment: Measurement of hardwood cuttings shall be made
on the basis of actual numbers of cutting prepared, counted on site and accepted.
The quantities thus measured shall be paid at the
unit rate shown in the Bill of Quantities. Such payment shall be the full and the
final compensation to the Contractor for all arrangements for collection of
materials and preparation of cuttings and providing the cuttings as per the
Specifications.
(3) Provision of Bamboo Cutting
(a) Bamboo cuttings shall be propagated by two different methods i.e. traditional
method and single node culm cuttings method.
(b) Cuttings shall be made from as many healthy individual culms as possible. The
culm from which the cuttings are taken shall show vigorous growth and good
form having heavily branched. Mis-shaven and stunted plants shall not be
considered as source.
(c) The Contractor shall be responsible for taking safety precautions and for making
all necessary arrangements with landowners, farmers and the local District
Forest Office, as applicable, before making of cuttings. The traditional method
which will require to take the whole culm and mother rhizome may eradicate the
further development of clump. In this case, the contractor shall be responsible to
make aware of such probability to the owner before taking the rhizomes from
such clump. However, if the sourcing clumps are growing on steep slopes, the
contractor shall not take more than 10% culm from the sourcing clump.
(d) The type of cuttings to be made which depend on the species shall be as shown
in Table 28.2. Single node culm cuttings or traditional rhizome cuttings shall be
made from the culm which are between 2-3 years old. Materials outside this
range shall not be used without the prior approval of the Engineer. The
Contractor shall be held liable if the success rate of single node culm cuttings is
lower than 60% and in the case of or rhizome cuttings not surviving 100%.
(e) Single node cuttings shall be made using sharp log saw. The top and bottom cut
shall be made at right angles to the stem. Under no circumstances shall there be
any damage to the bud and internode section of culm.
(f) The rhizome cuttings shall be made using sharp log saw, axe and secateurs.

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-6

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

(g) Once cuttings have been made, they shall be wrapped in wet hessian jute
immediately. At all times, cuttings shall be kept moist and as cool as possible,
and shall be wrapped in wet hessian between all operations such as taking from
the parent plant, transporting and planting. Under any circumstances, all cuttings
must be planted within two days of that they are made.
(h) Measurement and Payment: Measurement of bamboo cuttings shall be made on
the basis of actual numbers of cuttings prepared, counted on site and accepted.
The quantities thus measured shall be paid at the unit rate shown in the Bill of
Quantities. Such payment shall be the full and the final compensation to the
Contractor for all arrangements for purchasing of bamboo and preparation of
cuttings and providing the cuttings as per the Specifications.
Table 28.2: Types of Bamboo Cutting

Local Botanical Best

Details
name Name Propagation
Choya/tama Dendrocalamu Single Node culm/ Single node culm cuttings: - 1 node and
bans s hemiltonil rhizome cutting 150 mm of each side, straight and fine
cut, main branch should be 200-300 mm
long; Rhizome cuttings: - Culm 2500-
3000 mm length, leave all branches with
no leaf (manually flushed); rhizome:
300-500 mm.
Dhanu bans Bambusabalco Single Node culm/ Single node culm cuttings: - 1 node and
oa rhizome cutting 150 mm of each side, straight and fine
cut, main branch should be 200-300 mm
long; Rhizome cuttings: - Culm 2500-
3000 mm length, leave all branches with
no leaf (manually flushed); rhizome:
300-500 mm
Kalo bans Dendrocalamu Single node culm/ Single node culm cuttings: - 1 node and
s hookeri rhizome cutting 150 mm of each side, straight and fine
cut, main branch should be 200-300 mm
long; Rhizome cuttings: - Culm 2500-
3000 mm length, leave all branches with
no leaf (manually flushed); rhizome:
300-500 mm
Mal bans Bambusanutan Single node culm/ Single node culm cuttings: - 1 node and
s rhizome cutting 150 mm of each side, straight and fine
cut, main branch should be 200-300 mm
long; Rhizome cuttings: - Culm 2500-
3000 mm length, leave all branches with
no leaf (manually flushed); rhizome:
300-500 mm
MA lingo Arundinaria Rhizome cutting Rhizome cuttings: - Culm 2500-3000
bans maling mm length, leave all branches with no
leaf (manually flushed); rhizome: 300-
500 mm
Nibha/gopi Ampelocalamu Single node culm/ Single node culm cuttings: - 1 node and
bans s pattellaris rhizome cutting 150 mm of each side, straight and fine
cut, main branch should be 200-300 mm
long; Rhizome cuttings: - Culm 2500-

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-7

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Local Botanical Best

Details
name Name Propagation
3000 mm length, leave all branches with
no leaf (manually flushed); rhizome:
300-500 mm
Nigalo bans Phyllostrachys Rhizome cutting Rhizome cuttings: - Culm 2500-3000
mm length, leave all branches with no
leaf (manually flushed); rhizome: 300-
500 mm
Parayana Drepanoschyu Rhizome cutting Single node culm cuttings: - 1 node and
bans m 150 mm of each side, straight and fine
hookerieanum cut, main branch should be 200-300 mm
long; Rhizome cuttings: - Culm 2500-
3000 mm length, leave all branches with
no leaf (manually flushed); rhizome 300-
500 mm:
Tharu bans Ambulated Single node culm/ Single node culm cuttings: - 1 node
rhizome cutting and 150 mm of each side, straight
and fine cut, main branch should be
200-300 mm long;
Rhizome cuttings: - Culm 2500-3000
mm length, leave all branches with
no leaf (manually flushed); rhizome:
300-500 mm

2804 NURSERY CONSTRUCTION

The Contractor shall provide nurseries to contribute stocks of grasses, shrubs and
trees for planting operations as required by the Engineer. This shall be done
according to the specifications described hereunder, as and when required by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall supply all necessary expertise, resources and
facilities to ensure that these requirements are met.
The Contractor shall note that the establishment and effective operation of plant
nurseries is a skilled business requiring experienced and trained staff. These
specifications alone do not provide all the information needed to set up and run
nurseries. The Contractor shall seek the advice of specialist agencies and shall refer
to the large number of reference books available on the subject.
The purpose of a nursery shall be to supply good quality, healthy plants of the correct
type and species at the precise time they are required.
(1) Nursery Establishment
(a) The Contractor shall provide nursery facilities adequate to supply all of
the stock required for planting operations. Alternatively, he may procure
planting stock from elsewhere at the time of site planting, provided it is
of a standard acceptable to the Engineer and as described hereunder.
(b) In selecting a site for a nursery, if not instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor
shall fulfil the following requirements.
(i) Nurseries shall be as close as possible to all sites to be planted. They shall

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-8

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

be at the same altitude as, and in an identical climatic area to, the sites to
be planted.

(ii) Wherever possible, nurseries shall be established on land owned by the

Department of Roads if it is available and biophysically suitable. If it is
not, other land of His Majesty's Government shall be used if it is
available.
(iii) Nurseries shall have a reliable and adequate supply of water which
remains constant throughout the later part of the dry season.
(iv) Nurseries shall have all weather vehicular access.
(v) Nurseries shall have a perimeter of stock-proof fencing, effective against
all domestic animals.
(vi) Nurseries shall have a weather- and pest-proof office cum seed store and
proper storage facilities for seed. Seed shall be kept cool, dry and in
sealed containers, as-specified in Sub-clauses 2802 (1) and 2802 (2).
(vii) All nurseries shall be provided with at least two above-ground compost
bays, built of stone, brick or timber.
(viii) Where a nursery is established on a slope exceeding 2°, the ground shall
be levelled by terracing before beds are constructed.
(ix) A constant staff of qualified and experienced people must be provided.
(x) There shall be adequate space in each nursery location for all operations
to be performed in the cycle of work. In particular, all plants shall be
spaced out periodically as they grow and there shall be adequate bed area
to accommodate them.
(2) Construction of Nursery Beds
(a) Nursery beds shall be made in a different way according to their purpose. The
Contractor shall ensure that there are adequate beds available for all the
operations to be undertaken in the nursery.
(b) There shall be paths around all beds to ensure the best possible access for
operations such as weeding and watering.
(c) Table 28.3 summarizes the construction details of the five main bed types, which
are described in full in paragraphs (d) to (h).
Table 28.3: Construction Details of Nursery Beds

Bed type Bed size Details of construction

Beds for bare grass Bottom eidth 1200 Bottom of the bed should be compacted making a
seeding, grass slips mm and top width camber to facilitate the drainage; 50 mm washed
propagation 1000 mm x 200 mm gravel placed above the ground; then 50 mm of 1:1
high mix of soil and compost; and topped with 100 mm of
3:1 mix of sieved forest topsoil and washed sand.

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-9

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Bed type Bed size Details of construction

Beds for bare root tree Bottom width 1200 Bottom of the bed should be compacted making a
seedlings mm and top width camber to facilitate the drainage; 50 mm washed
1000 mm x 200 mm gravel placed above the ground; then 50 mm of 1:1
high mix of soil and compost; and topped with 100 mm of
3:1 mix of sieved forest topsoil and washed sand.
Seed beds for 1000 mm wide Bed should be providing with brick, flat stone or
tree/shrub seedling (external), 170 mm plank edging as determined by the Engineer; shade
high with edging; should be provided of waterproof materials or as
Shade 900 mm of determined by the Engineer; 50 mm of washed
height on the lower gravel placed above the compacted and cambered
ground; then 50 mm un-sieved forest soil 50 mm of
side and 1200 mm
1:3 mix of sieved forest soil and washed sand; and
higher side.
topped with 20 mm of washed, sieved and sterilized
sand.
Stand out beds for 1000 mm wide Bed should be providing with brick, flat stone or
tree/shrub seedlings. (external), 170 mm plank edging as determined by the Engineer; shade
high with edging; should be provided of waterproof materials or as
Shade 900 mm of determined by the Engineer; 50 mm of washed
height on the lower gravel placed above the compacted and cambered
side and 1200 mm ground
higher side.
Bead for the Bottom width 1200 Ground below the bed is dug to a depth of 300 mm.
propagation of bamboo mm and top width Bed is made with 100 mm of un sieved soil (lower)
culm cutting and stool 1000 mm x 200 mm and 200 mm of sieved soil (upper). A bund of 100
bed for tree and shrub high mm high is formed around the edge. 1500 mm high
cutting shade of bamboo frame jute is made.

(d) Grass beds shall be constructed to hold grass seeds; grasses being propagated by
vegetative means. These can be of any practical length but shall be flat and of
1200 mm base width and 1000 mm of top width on compacted and a cambered
ground. They shall rise to a height of 200 mm above the surrounding ground.
They shall be made up as follows: 50 mm of washed gravel is placed above the
ground; then 50 mm of 1:1 mix of soil and compost; and the bed is topped with
100 mm of 3:1 mix of fertile, loamy forest topsoil and washed sand. All sieving
shall be done with a mesh size of 2 mm or smaller.
(e) Bare root beds shall be constructed to hold seedlings transplanted from the seed
beds. These can be of any practical length but shall be flat and of 1200 mm base
width and 1000 mm of top width on compacted and a cambered ground. They
shall rise to a height of 200 mm above the surrounding ground. They shall be
made up as follows: 50 mm of washed gravel is placed above the ground; then
50 mm of 1:1 mix of soil and compost; and the bed is topped with 150 mm of
3:1 mix of fertile, loamy forest topsoil and washed sand. All sieving shall be
done with a mesh size of 2 mm or smaller.
(f) Seed beds shall be made very carefully for germinating small seeds of shrubs
and trees. These can be of any practical length but shall be flat and of one metre
in width on compacted and a cambered ground. They shall rise to a height of 170
mm above the surrounding ground and provided with shadings as per the details
given in the following paragraph.

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-10

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

(i). They shall be made up as follows: 50 mm of washed gravel placed on the

ground; then 50 mm of unsieved forest soil; 50 mm of 1:3 mix of forest soil
and washed sand; and the bed is topped with 20 mm of washed, and sterilised
sand. All sieving shall be done with a mesh size of 2 mm.
(g) Standout beds shall be constructed to hold seedlings in polythene pots. These
can be of any practical length but shall be flat and of one metre width. Bed floors
shall be above surrounding ground level and they shall have a 50 mm layer of
washed gravel on the compacted and cambered ground. They shall have a
surround, preferably made from flat stones, plank or bricks. The bed shall then
be covered with the highly porous shadings as per the details provided in the
following paragraph (i).
(h) Beds for the propagation of bamboo culm cuttings and stool cuttings of trees
and shrubs, shall be made specially. These can be of any practical length but
shall be flat and of 1000 mm width at top and 1200 width at bottom. They shall
rise to a height of 300 mm above the surrounding ground. They shall be made
up as follows: the ground below the bed is dug to a depth of 300 mm; the bed
itself is then made with 100 mm of unsieved soil on the original surface, and
200 mm of soil above this. All soil sieving shall be done with a mesh size of 2
mm or smaller. Finally, a bund of 100 mm high shall be formed around the
edge.
(i) Shades shall be constructed over the beds and kept in position over delicate
seedlings during hours of intense sunlight, according to need. Shades shall be
900 to 1200 mm above the ground, and angled so as to be effective for as much
of the day as possible (i.e. with the lower side to the south). Bamboo strips laced
together with nylon string are particularly suitable in most cases; but over tree
and shrub seed beds, thatched shades with a polythene lining shall be used.
(3) Measurement and Payment: Work to be measured shall be the actual top area in sq. m
of beds constructed on site and accepted. Only the finished area of the beds shall be
considered after the completion of its shades. However, despite the fact that shades
will be covering larger area than the beds, the final measurement shall be governed by
the area of the top of the bed for payment. The payment shall be the full and the final
compensation to the Contractor for providing all materials to be incorporated, ail
labour, tools, equipment and incidentals to complete the works of Nursery
establishment and construction of Nursery beds as per these Specifications.
2805 NURSERY OPERATION AND MANAGEMENT
(a) The contractor shall operate the nursery according to a high standard. The nursery
shall be staffed well-tended at all times. It shall be maintained in clean, tidy and
efficient manner at all times. Plants shall always be healthy and vigorous.
(b) Due to the nature of bio-engineering works, nurseries shall normally be operated and
managed by small local contractors with a range of agricultural skills provided it is
specified in the Contract. If provided in the Contract, nurseries may also be operated

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-11

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

and managed by direct employees of the Division Road Office.

(c) Plants shall be kept properly weeded at all times.
(d) Watering, as required for good plant growth, shall be carried out regularly in the cool
of the evening between sunset and dusk. The Contractor shall ensure that the soil in
all beds is kept moist but not saturated at all times. Beds shall be kept moist even when
empty, so that the soil is kept in good condition.
(e) The timing of nursery operations shall be of the utmost importance. Activities such as
seed sowing and the taking of cutting shall be carried out within the critical few weeks
when they will yield the desired results. Most other operations, such as spacing out,
root pruning and watering, shall also be carried out in a timely manner in accordance
with the Nursery Calendar published by the Geo-Environment and Social Unit of the
Department of Roads. The Contractor shall be responsible to keep works to the strict
schedule required and under no circumstances to permit delays.
(f) Measurement and Payment: The basis of measurement shall be the actual numbers of
plants counted, certified and accepted by the Engineer. Quantities measured as above
shall be paid at the unit rates entered in the Bill of Quantities. Such payment shall be
the full and the final compensation to the Contractor for executing all the works as
specified in these Specifications.
(1) Nursery Production of Grass
(a) Grass shall be propagated in nurseries either by seeding in carefully prepared
beds or by vegetative propagation.
(b) Where grass seeding is required in the nursery, finely sieved fertile soil mixed
with clean sand to a texture of sandy loam shall be placed in beds before the
seeds are sown. Seeds shall be covered with a sheet of hessian jute until they
have germinated, then it shall be carefully removed. Watering of fresh seedlings
shall be done by a fine spray and not by the rose of a watering can.
(c) Grasses to be propagated by vegetative methods shall be of the species
instructed. The Contractor shall obtain adequate quantities of the plant material
required, but under no circumstances shall the to cause serious depletion of grass
stocks in any steep or erosion-prone area.
(d) Vegetative propagation shall normally be by rhizome cuttings. With this method,
the grass shall be treated in exactly the same way as a bamboo being propagated
by the traditional technique. A clump shall be carefully dug up and brought to
the nursery, being kept cool and damp at all times. Stems shall be cut above the
first or second node above the ground: this usually gives a length of 100 to 200
mm. The clump shall be separated carefully, with the minimum of damage to
the rhizomes and fine roots. Slips shall be separated out which keep a length of
stem and about 50 mm of the rhizome. Each slip shall have some buds on the
rhizome, but in some grasses these can be difficult to see. The slips shall be
planted with the soil surface at the same level as it was originally, in

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-12

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

rows at 200 mm centres; slips shall be at 200 mm centres within the rows. A
sheet of hessian jute shall be placed over the tops of the cuttings. When the new
shoots are about 50 mm long, it shall be removed.
(e) Every two to three months, all grasses shall be lifted from the beds, split carefully
and replanted. It is normal that, once split out, three times the previous bed area
is required. This is a standard practice to bulk up the supply of planting stock
without having to degrade the natural vegetation cover in the region of the
nursery.
(f) Measurement and payment: The basis of measurement shall be the actual area of
live grasses covered surfaces in sq. m. Quantities measured as above shall be
paid at the unit rates entered in the Bill of Quantities. Such payment shall be
considered the full and the final compensation to the Contractor for executing all
the works as specified in these Specifications.
(2) Nursery Production of Trees and Shrubs in Polypots
(a) Trees and shrubs shall be seeded either in seed beds or directly in polythene pots
("polypots"). Finely sieved fertile soil mixed with clean sand to a texture of
sandy loam shall be placed in well shaded beds for seeding. Watering of fresh
seedlings shall be by a fine spray, and not by the rose of a watering can.
(b) All pants shall be grown on in pots of dimensions 100 x 180 mm (4 x 7 inches)
or greater when laid flat. The pots shall be of black, 200-gauge polythene. They
shall have adequate drainage holes at the bottom and be filled with fertile forest
topsoil mixed with clean sand to a texture of sandy loam.
(c) Roots protruding from the bottom of pots shall be pruned with a razor blade on
regular basis which shall not exceed weekly and may need to be more frequent.
Protruding roots shall never be allowed to become more than 25 mm in length.
(d) When polypot seedlings begin to compete with each other for light, they shall be
re- spaced as required. This would typically mean doubling the bed space
occupied by the plants.
(e) To be acceptable for planting on site, trees and shrubs shall be healthy, vigorous
and showing no signs of damage, wilt, irregular growth, fungal or pest attack, or
nutrient disorders. They shall be at least 300 mm in height above soil surface
level and of good form. The roots shall be in good condition and there should be
no signs of disturbance to the soil in the polythene pot, even after transport to
site.
(f) Measurement and Payment: The basis of measurement shall be the actual
numbers of plants counted, certified and accepted by the Engineer. Quantities
measured as above shall be paid at the unit rates entered in the Bill of Quantities.
Such payment shall be the full and the final compensation to the Contractor for
executing all the works as specified in these Specifications.

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-13

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

(3) Nursery Production of Hardwood Plants by Vegetative Methods

(a) Trees and shrubs which can be propagated by vegetative methods may be
specified by the Engineer. The Contractor shall produce these by the appropriate
method, as required.
(b) All cuttings and stools shall be made as specified in Sub-clause 2803(2) and
planted in fertile soil beds of the type specified in Sub-clause 2804 (2).
(c) Cuttings shall be planted 300 mm apart in holes slightly larger than their diameter.
They shall be placed at such a depth that only one bud remains above the soil
surface (i.e. about 30 mm of the cutting).
(d) When plants compete with each other for light, they shall be cut back as
necessary.
(e) To be acceptable for planting on site, trees and shrubs produced in this way must
be healthy, vigorous and showing no signs of damage, wilt, irregular growth,
fungal or pest attack, or nutrient disorders. They shall be at least 500 mm in height
above soil surface level and of good form.
(f) Measurement and Payment: The basis of measurement shall be the actual
numbers of plants counted, certified and accepted by the Engineer. Quantities
measured as above shall be paid at the unit rates entered in the Bill of Quantities.
Such payment shall be the full and the final compensation to the Contractor for
executing all the works as specified in these Specifications.
(4) Extraction of Plants from the Nursery
(a) The Contractor shall be responsible for extracting plants from nursery beds and
preparing them ready for transport. They shall be extracted from the beds only
on the morning that they are required for planting on site.
(b) Plants shall be hardened off, starting at least two weeks before they are to be
taken out of the nursery. This process shall require a gradual reduction in the
amount of watering and shading. The aim is to prepare them for transfer to a
much more hostile location.
(c) The night before the plants are to be lifted, they shall be thoroughly watered.
This is to make the soil softer and ease the business of extracting the roots.
(d) Plants growing in soil beds shall be carefully lifted from the soil. There shall be
no pulling of stems or roots, but they shall be dug out and extracted with no strain
on any part of the plant.
(e) Plants from soil beds shall be wrapped in wet hessian jute. Hardwood plants shall
have a ball of soil around the roots. Grass clumps can have most of the soil
shaken or washed off.
(f) Polypot seedlings shall be lifted and stacked neatly in metal or wooden trays.
They shall always be lifted by the pot and never by the stem or leaves.
(g) All plants shall to be kept moist, in a cool, shady place, until they are loaded for

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-14

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

transport to site. In the vehicle, they shall not be stacked high. For transport on
rough roads, they shall be packed in carefully so that they do not fall over or roll
around. The vehicle shall be shaded.
(h) Measurement and Payment: The basis of measurement shall be the actual
numbers of plants counted, certified and accepted by the Engineer. Quantities
measured as above shall be paid at the unit rates entered in the Bill of Quantities.
Such payment shall be the full and the final compensation to the Contractor for
executing all the works as specified in these Specifications.
(5) Compost and Mulch Production
The Contractor shall produce compost and mulch for nursery or site operations. It shall
be produced in a timely manner, in the quantities red. Compost is normally required
to sustain the long term fertility of nursery beds. Mulch may also be used in then
nursery, but normally produced to enhance site planting works, particularly the direct
seeding of grass.
(a) Compost and mulch shall be made from annual and perennial weeds of poor
rooting characteristics, such as ban mara (Eupatorium adenopherum) and tite
pate (Artemesiavulgans). The greenery shall be collected when there is most
material available but before it forms seeds. This is most often in Shrawan and
Bhadra.
(b) Collected material shall be chopped finely and stored in a mound, compost bay
or pit. The maximum size for chopped compost is 50 mm; the maximum size for
chopped mulch is 150 mm.
(c) Both compost and mulch shall be kept moist but not waterlogged and in an
aerated condition. They shall be completely turned once a month on a regular
schedule. Compost can have cow manure mixed in to assist the process of
decomposition.
(d) Neither compost nor mulch shall be applied until they are fully rotted. By this
time, they shall be black and the parts of individual plants shall be
indistinguishable. Early application shall not be allowed as this can lead to a
nutrient loss in the soil if microbes extract nitrogen to decompose the added
organic material.
(e) Measurement and Payment: The basis of measurement shall be the actual
quantity of compost and mulch provided, accepted and certified by the Engineer
in cu. m. or kg. Quantities measured as above shall be paid at the unit rates
entered in the Bill of Quantities. Such payment shall be the full and the final
compensation to the Contractor for executing all the works as specified in these
Specifications.
2806 FINAL SLOPE PREPARATION FOR BI0-ENGINEERING
(a) The Contractor shall prepare slopes for planting operations as required by the engineer.
This shall be done according to the specifications described hereunder, as and when
required. The Contractor shall supply all necessary expertise, resources and facilities

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-15

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

to ensure that these requirements are met.

(b) In the course of all slope preparation works, it shall be essential that no damage is done
to existing vegetation unless the Engineer's instruction specifically requires certain
plants to be removed.
(c) The timing of bio-engineering operations shall be of the utmost importance. Activities
such as planting and seed sowing shall be carried out within the critical few weeks
when they will yield the desired results. All other operations shall be carried out in
timely manner to permit this to happen. The contractor shall be responsible to keep
works to the strict schedule required and under no circumstances to permit delays.
(d) As slope trimming business can be dangerous and risky to personnel, the Contractor
shall be responsible to ensure the safety of his/her and Client's personnel while putting
in the dangerous situation. It shall be essential to have the minimum of safety measures
as listed below for a working gang of 10 people. The proportion of the safety harness
shall be increased according to the requirements and labours employed on site.
The Contractor shall provide all safety measures as listed in Table 28.4 for his/her
workers who will be on site and Employer's personnel who will be supervising the
work within the Contractor's working premises.
Table 28.4: Materials Required for Safety Measures
S.No. Description Quantity
Safety rope (mountaineering type or similar make having a min
1 20 mm diameter and 30 meter in length. For every worker
2 Safety belt similar to tree climbers or scaffolders use. For every worker
3 Goggles and dust proof masks For every worker
4 Safety hats For every worker
5 Knee pad For every worker
6 First aid kit with necessary medicines and bandages 1 box per working gang
7 Stretcher 1 no per working gang

(1) Cut Slope Preparation for Grass Planting

(a) The objective of final cut slope preparation shall be to produce a surface
adequately prepared for grass planting. Grass lines shall be used to provide a
strong surface cover. Grass lines shall be planted over a well prepared surface.
The slope shall not be subject to any undue stress from erosion and mass
movement in its initial stages.
(b) All the construction work shall be checked prior to slope trimming. The site shall
be clear of people and equipment.
(c) Trimming shall be as follows:
new sites: trimming to straight plan section;
retaining wall to be filled behind;
old sites: minor trimming only required on part of site;
keeping rill or gully pattern in plan section;

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-16

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

(d) The Contractor shall ensure that the slope under instruction is trimmed to a
straight angle, according to the Engineer's instructions. Cut slopes to be planted
with grass shall normally be 3 verticals: 2 horizontals, unless otherwise shown
on the Drawing or instructed by the Engineer. In any event, a straight profile
shall be obtained. Concavities shall be filled with well compacted material or dry
stone dentition as instructed by the Engineer. Convexities shall be removed and
it shall be ensured that the general profile does not have a shape giving over-
steep segments
(e) All loose material shall be removed from the slope and tipped elsewhere in an
approved location.
(f) Measurement and Payment: Work shall be measured in square meters on the
basis of actual area of trimmed surface. The payment shall be the full and the
final compensation to the contractor for making arrangements for traffic control,
trimming, removal of loose materials, all labour, tools equipment, safety harness
and incidentals to complete the work as specified herein.
(2) Final Preparation of Fill Slopes for Bio- Engineering
(a) The objective of the final preparation of fill slopes shall be to produce a surface
adequately prepared for shrub or tree planting or grass sowing, or a combination
of these. Vegetation shall be used to provide a strong surface cover. Vegetation
shall be planted over a well prepared surface. The slope shall not be subject to
any undue stress from erosion and mass movement in its initial stages.
(b) The Contractor shall ensure that the slope under instruction is trimmed to a
straight angle, according to the Drawing or instruction of the Engineer. In any
event, a straight profile shall be obtained. All masses of loose debris, especially
where it has previously been tipped at the head of the slope, shall be removed.
Concavities shall be filled with well compacted material or dry stone dentition
as shown on the Drawing or instructed by the Engineer. Convexities shall also
be removed and it shall be ensured that the general profile does not have a shape
giving over-steep segments.
(c) All loose material shall be removed from the slope and tipped elsewhere in an
approved location.
(d) Measurement and Payment: The work shall be measured in square meters on the
basis of actual area of trimmed surface as shown on the Drawing or instructed
and approved by the Engineer. The quantities measured shall be paid at the unit
rates shown in the Bill of Quantities. Such payment shall be the full and the final
compensation to the Contractor for making arrangements for traffic control,
trimming, removal of loose materials, all labour, tools, equipment, safety harness
and incidentals to complete the work as specified herein.
2807 SITE PLANTING AND SOWING
(a) The Contractor shall plant or sow grasses, shrubs and trees as shown on the Drawing

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-17

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

or required by the Engineer. This shall be done according to the specifications

described hereunder, as and when required. The Contractor shall supply all necessary
expertise, resources and facilities to ensure that these requirements are met.
(b) Due to the nature of bio-engineering works, they may also be undertaken by small
local contractors with a range of agricultural skills, if so provided in the Contract. If
provided in the Contract, any bio-engineering site activity may also be managed by
direct employees of the Division Road Office.
(c) It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that all planting stock, whether
provided from a nursery under a separate contract or through a separate instruction, is
of high quality and is vigorous enough to grow on the site to be planted.
(d) All seeds and other planting stock shall be of species indigenous to Myanmar unless
otherwise specified. All species shall be covered in the current approved lists of
species produced from time to time by the Geo-Environment and Social Unit of the
Department of Roads. They shall be appropriate for the precise site conditions in
which they are to be planted and the Contractor shall ensure that they apply to the
specific altitude and other environmental characteristics of the site in question.
(e) Activities such as planting and seed sowing shall be carried out within the critical few
weeks when they will yield the desired results. All other operations shall be carried
out in a timely manner to permit this to happen. The Contractor shall be responsible
to keep works to the strict schedule required and under no circumstances to permit
delays.
(1) Sowing of Grasses on Site
(a) The Contractor shall be required to carry out the sowing of grass seeds according
to the Engineer's specific instructions.
(b) If the site for sowing is to be prepared under a separate contract, then it shall be
assumed that the site will already have been prepared for seed sowing.
Nevertheless, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the
condition of the site is good enough for the successful establishment of grasses.
(c) The Contractor shall be required to supervise all field operations very closely.
The sowing of grass seeds is a delicate business and shall be approached in the
same way as for agricultural crops. The Contractor shall employ experienced
agricultural labourers for this work.
(d) If seeds have to be provided under a separate contract, then they shall be properly
stored. However, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to check that it has
been carefully stored and remains fully viable.
(e) Immediately before sowing, the ground surface shall be lightly scarified using a
rake to ease early root penetration. Seeds shall then be laid thinly over the
surface. Under no circumstances shall they be broadcast, because the lightness
of perennial grass seeds and the steepness of the slopes to be treated give a poor
cover using such a technique. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-18

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

that the correct quantities of seeds are used, while giving a good, even cover.
(f) A cover of 25 grams of grass seed per square metre of surface shall be achieved
unless otherwise specified.
(g) After sowing, a mulch of prepared and dried cut herbs shall be laid over the
whole seeded area in a thin layer. If the mulch is too thick it will prevent light
from getting to the seed and will inhibit germination. Herbs suitable for this and
locally available in large quantities are:
 Tite pate (Artemisia vulgans);
 Tapre (Cassia species);
 Ban mara (Eupatorium adenophorum).
However, freshly cut herbs shall not be used because of the danger of resprouting
and weeding.
(h) If specified, the mulch should be secured with jute netting of mesh size 300x 500
mm and the netting fixed in place using suitable live pegs or hardwood cuttings
(e.g. Simali, Vitexnegundo) at one metre centres.
(i) Measurement and Payment: Work shall be measured in square meters on the
basis of actual area of grass seeded and covered surface. The payment shall be
the full and the final compensation to the Contractor for making arrangements
for traffic control, providing seeds, collection and application of mulch, all
labour, tools, equipment, safety harness and incidentals to complete the work as
specified herein. If the seeds and mulch are supplied through a separate contract,
costs for the supply of the same shall not be included herein. However, if the
Contractor is responsible for the supply and storage of seeds and mulch no
separate payment shall be made for these items.
(2) Direct Seed Sowing of Shrubs and Trees on Site
(a) The Contractor shall be required to carry out the sowing of shrub and tree seeds
according to the Engineer's specific instructions.
(b) It is assumed that the site will already have been prepared for seed sowing, if this
item has to be executed under a separate contract. Nevertheless, it shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the condition of the site is good
enough for the successful establishment of shrubs and trees.
(c) The Contractor shall be required to supervise all field operations very closely.
As the sowing of any seeds is a delicate business and, therefore, shall be
approached in the same way as for agricultural crops. The Contractor shall
employ experienced agricultural labourers for this work.
(d) Seed shall have been collected and stored well before the time of sowing, if they
have to be supplied under a separate contract. However, it shall be the
Contractor’s responsibility to check that it has been carefully stored and remains
fully viable.
(e) Sowing shall start at the top of the slope and the labourers shall work downwards.
Care shall be taken not to disturb areas already seeded.

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-19

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

(f) To sow the seeds, a small hole shall be made in the slope. The tool used to do
this shall depend on the size of the seed. For some seeds, a piece of gabion wire
will be adequate; for others, a piece of mild steel with a flattened end is required.
The hole shall be in the best soil available but if there is little real soil, then a
crevice between two stones is acceptable. Two seeds should be placed in each
hole and a covering of soil or whatever fines are available shall be placed over
them. This covering shall never exceed 10 mm and shall preferably be about 5
mm; it shall never be less than and this. Seeds shall be placed at 200 to 250 mm
centres, as ground conditions dictate.
(g) In some cases, the seed can be broadcast starting at the top of the site and
working down slope as evenly as possible so that the whole site is lightly
covered. This shall be used where the site is still active and only warrants
minimum expenditure, or where the site is naturally rough, providing plenty of
niches in which the seed can catch. Quantities of seed shall depend on the type
of seed involved but are generally half that of the quantities used in the nursery
unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer. With utis (Alnusnepalensis) seed it
shall be at a rate of 1 gram of seed per square metre.
(h) Measurement and Payment: Work shall be measured in square meters on the
basis of actual area of grass seeded and covered surface. The payment shall be
the full and the final compensation to the Contractor for making arrangements
for traffic control, providing seeds, collection and application of mulch, all
labour, tools, equipment, safety harness and incidentals to complete the work as
specified herein. If the seeds and mulch are supplied through a separate contract,
costs for the supply of the same shall not be included herein. However, if the
Contractor is responsible for the supply and storage of seeds and mulch no
separate payment shall be made for these items.
(3) Site Planting of Grass Slips and Cuttings
(a) The Contractor shall be required to carry out the planting of grass seedlings or
rooted the cuttings, according to the Engineer's specific instructions. The
configuration of planting shall be determined according to individual site
conditions. It shall be either random, contoured or downslope, as instructed by
the Engineer.
(b) It is assumed that the site shall already have been prepared for planting, if this is
to be prepared under a separate contract. Nevertheless, it shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the condition of the site is good
enough for the successful establishment of grasses, and accords with the
specifications given in Clause 2806.
(c) Using appropriate tools (such as tape measures and spirit levels), planting lines
shall be marked out with string as required. Unless specified differently, the row
spacing to be marked out shall be as shown in Table 28.5.
(d) The Contractor shall be required to supervise all field operations very closely.

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-20

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

Since the planting of grass slips is a delicate business and therefore shall be
approached in the same way as the transplanting of millet seedlings. The
Contractor shall employ this experienced agricultural labourers for this work.

Table 28.5: Row Spacing Details

spacing
Planting configuration Slope steepness
All slopes 100 mm planting drill to drill
Random lines
Slopes less than 35 o 100 mm planting drill to drill and 1000 mm
Contour lines
between the lines

Slopes 35o - 45o 100 mm planting drill to drill and 500 mm

between the lines
Slopes more than 45o 100 mm planting drill to drill and 300 mm
between the lines

Slopes less than 35 o 100 mm planting drill to drill and 500 mm

Diagonal
between the lines
Slopes more than 35o 100 mm planting drill to drill and 300 mm
between the lines
All slopes 100 mm planting drill to drill and 300 mm
Downslope lines
between the lines

(e) The plants supplied to the Contractor from nursery (if so provided in the
Contract) shall be prepared for planting by the Contractor as given below. The
Contractor shall transport them from the nursery wrapped in hessian jute. At all
times, plants shall be kept moist and as cool as possible, and should be wrapped
in wet hessian between all operations such as extraction from the bed, pruning
and planting. Under any circumstances, all plants supplied shall be planted
within two days of that they are lifted from the nursery.
(f) Grass slips or cutting shall be carefully separated from the clumps to give the
maximum viable planting material. Preparation of slips, cuttings or rhizomes
shall be strictly followed as mentioned in Sub-clause 2803 (1).
(g) Planting shall be started at the top of the slope and under no circumstances shall
new plants be walked on or otherwise disturbed. Using a small bar (usually made
of mild steel and with a flattened end), a hole shall be made that is just big enough
for the roots. The slip or cutting is inserted; care shall be taken that the roots are
not tangled or bent back to the surface. Soil shall then be replaced around the
roots and firmed with the fingers. The spacing of plants within rows shall be 100
mm unless otherwise specified. Two grass slips shall be planted in each drill.
(h) If the soil is dry and there is no rain within 16 to 24 hours of planting, the site
shall be watered carefully with a fine spray. The Contractor shall be required to
water for the first two weeks after planting in the event of inadequate rainfall.
(i) If it provided in the Contract that the plants are to be collected from locations
other than nurseries then utmost care shall be taken to minimize disruption to

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-21

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

neighbouring land, in the event that species are collected from areas surrounding
the road. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to collect the stock required
from a wide area and not to give rise to any soil erosion through the excessive
removal of plants in one locality.
(j) Measurement and Payment: The measurement shall be the actual area of grass
planted and covered surface in square meters for the random planting and any
other patterns of planting up to the 300 mm between the lines. The contour line
planting in 500-1000 mm in any slopes shall be measured in linear meter. The
payment shall be the full and final compensation to the Contractor for making
arrangements for traffic control, providing grass slips or rhizome, collection of
mulch, all labour, tools, equipment, safety harness and incidentals to complete
the work as per these Specifications. If the grass slips and mulch are supplied
through a separate contract, costs for the supply of the same shall not be included
herein. However, if the Contractor is responsible for the supply slips and mulch,
no separate payment shall be made for these items.
(4) Site Planting of Shrubs and Trees raised in Polythene Pots
(a) The planting of trees and shrubs is intended to replace or restore something of
the natural vegetation on the slope to be treated. The Contractor shall be required
to carry out the planting of seedlings to the Engineer's specific instructions.
(b) It is assumed that the site will already have been prepared for planting if it has
to be prepared under a separate contract. Nevertheless, it shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the condition of the site is good
enough for the successful establishment of delicate young plants.
(c) The spacing of plants shall be determined according to individual site conditions.
However, it shall normally be at 1.5 meters' interval unless otherwise specified
or instructed by the Engineer.
(d) The Contractor shall be required to supervise all field operations very closely.
As the planting of trees and shrubs is a delicate business and should be
approached in the same way as the planting of horticultural seedlings. The
Contractor shall employ experienced agricultural or forestry labourers for this
work.
(e) If the plants are to be supplied to the Contractor from a nursery under a separate
contract, they will be ready for planting. They shall be at least 300 mm in height
above the soil surface and hardened off in the normal way. The Contractor shall
collect the plants from the nursery and transport them to site with all due care.
The plants will normally be supplied in polythene pots, which shall not be
removed until the moment of planting. Plants shall be lifted by the pots, never
by the stem or leaves. At all times they are to be kept as cool as possible. The
Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the soil around the roots does
not dry out. Under any circumstances, all plants supplied must be planted within
three days of removal from the nursery.

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-22

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

If it is provided in the Contract that the Contractor is responsible for the supply
of land, plants, he shall maintain the same workmanship and standard as
specified herein.
(f) Planting shall be started at the top of the slope and under no circumstances shall
new plants be walked on or otherwise disturbed.
(g) A planting pit wide and deep enough for the main root to be buried in without
bending it and wide enough for all the roots and surrounding soil ball shall be
made at the time of planting. Some compost if available shall be mixed with the
soil from the slit prior to backfilling around the roots. The polythene pot must be
removed from the seedling by cutting it away with a razor blade. The plant
should then be carefully placed into the hole, the compost and soil packed in,
and all surrounding soil firmed up, taking care not to cause any damage to the
plant or its roots. The surface over and around the pit shall then be mulched using
any appropriate, locally available material, such as manure, compost, dead
leaves or cut herbage. The use of freshly cut ban mara (Eupatorium
adenophorum) shall be avoided, since it can resprout from the buds after being
cut.
(h) The Engineer may specify bigger seedlings for specific areas, such as those to
be used intensively for amenity purposes. These will normally have been
growing in a nursery for at least a year and should have well developed roots as
well as aerial parts. They will be provided either as bare root stock with a
substantial root ball, or in pots of a minimum of 100 x 180 mm laid flat
dimensions. When these larger seedlings are planted, the pits shall be of 300 mm
diameter and 300 mm depth. In addition, well-rotted compost shall be mixed
with the soil backfill in a ratio of at least one-part compost to ten parts soil.
Measurement and Payment: The measurement shall be made in number of
seedlings planted, counted and accepted by the Engineer at site. The quantities
measured shall be paid at the unit rates shown in the Bill of Quantities. This
payment shall be the full and the final compensation to the Contractor for making
arrangements for traffic control, providing seedlings, collection and application
of mulch, all labour, tools, equipment, safety harness and incidentals to complete
the work as per these Specifications. If the seedlings and mulch are supplied
through a separate contract, costs for the supply of the same shall not be included
herein. However, if the Contractor is responsible for the supply seedlings and
mulch, no separate payment shall be made for these items.
(5) Site Planting of Hardwood Cutting
(a) Certain trees and shrubs can be planted on site by means of hard wood cuttings.
Where these are specified, the Contractor shall be required to carry out the
planting of cuttings as required in the Engineer's instructions.
(b) It is assumed that the site will already have been prepared for planting, if it is to
be prepared under a separate contract. Nevertheless, it shall be the responsibility

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-23

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

of the Contractor to ensure that the condition of the site is good enough for the
successful establishment of delicate young plants.
(c) The spacing of hardwood cutting shall be determined according to individual site
conditions. However, it will normally be at 500 mm centres unless otherwise
specified.
(d) The Contractor shall be required to supervise all field operations very closely.
The planting of tree and shrub cuttings is a delicate business and shall be
approached in the same way as the planting of horticultural cuttings (e.g. those
of tea). The Contractor shall employ experienced agricultural or forestry
labourers for this work.
(e) The cuttings supplied to the Contractor will normally be from a nursery as
arranged by separate instructions, and will be ready for planting. If these cuttings
are to be provided by the Contractor himself, he shall make such arrangements
so as to make the cuttings ready for planting. The size of the cuttings shall be
prepared as specified in Sub-clause 2803 (2) unless otherwise instructed by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall collect the cuttings from the nursery (if provided
in the Contract) and transport them from the nursery wrapped in hessian jute. At
all times, cuttings shall be kept moist and as cool as possible, and shall be
wrapped in wet hessian between all operations such as cutting from the parent
plant, trimming and planting. Under any circumstances, all plants supplied shall
be planted the same day that they are lifted from the nursery.
(f) Planting shall be started at the top of the slope and under no circumstances shall
new plants be walked on or otherwise disturbed. Using a small bar (usually made
of mild steel and with a pointed end), a hole shall be made that is just big enough
for the cutting. The cutting shall be inserted and the soil shall be replaced around
it and firmed with the fingers. The cutting shall be inserted to depth such that
two-thirds to three-quarters of it is buried.
(g) If the soil is dry and there is no rain within 16 to 24 hours of planting, the site
shall be watered carefully with a fine spray. The Contractor shall be required to
water for the first two weeks after planting in the event of inadequate rainfall.
(h) If it is provided in the Contract that the cuttings to be used are to be from
elsewhere other than nurseries, then the Contractor shall obtain them in the
manner described in Sub-clause 2803 (2).
(i) The Engineer may specify bigger cuttings for specific areas, using large
truncheon cuttings. In this category fall chuletro (Brassaiopsishainla), dabdabe
(Garugapinnata), kavro (Ficuslacory, phaledo (Erythrina species), ghurbis
(Leucosceptrumcanum) and Gliricidiasepium. Cuttings of these species should
planted at 1000 mm centres burring up to 500 mm. A large crowbar shall be used
to make the planting hole, but otherwise the technique shall be as described
above for smaller cuttings. Under no circumstances shall these cuttings be
hammered into the ground.

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-24

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

(j) Measurement and Payment: The measurement shall be made on the basis of per
number of cuttings planted, counted and accepted on site by the Engineer. The
quantities measured shall be paid at the unit rates shown in the Bill of Quantities.
This payment shall be the full and final compensation to the Contractor for
making arrangements for traffic control, providing and delivering seedlings, all
labour, tools, equipment, safety harness and incidentals to complete the work as
per these Specifications. If the seedlings are supplied through a separate contract,
costs for the supply of the same shall not be included herein. However, if the
Contractor is responsible for the supply seedlings, no separate payment shall be
made for this item.
(6) Brush Layering, Palisades and Fascines
(a) Under certain conditions, the Contractor shall be required to construct vegetation
structures using hardwood cuttings. Where these are specified, the Contractor
shall be required to carry out the necessary preparation and planting works as
required in the Engineer's instructions.
(b) It is assumed that the site will already have been prepared for planting, if it has
to be prepared under a separate contract. Nevertheless, it shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the condition of the site is good
enough for the successful establishment of delicate young plants.
(c) The cuttings supplied to the Contractor may be from a nursery as arranged under
a separate contract, and will be ready for planting. If the cuttings have to be
arranged by the Contractor, he shall ensure that they are ready for planting. The
cuttings shall be prepared as specified in Sub-clause 2803 (2) or as instructed by
the Engineer. The Contractor shall collect the cuttings from the nursery and
transport them from the nursery wrapped in hessian jute. At all times, cuttings
shall be kept moist and as cool as possible, and shall be wrapped in wet hessian
or in the thick blanket of mulch material (i.e. as titepati and ban mara) between
all operations such as cutting from the parent plant, trimming and planting.
Under any circumstances, all plants supplied shall be planted the same day that
they are lifted from the nursery.
(d) If the instruction to the Contractor includes the provision of cuttings, then the
Engineer shall specify the species and expected sources, and the Contractor must
then obtain the cuttings required. This shall be done in the manner described in
Sub-clause 2803 (2) except that the size of cuttings will be of a minimum length
of 450-600 mm for brush layering, 600 mm for palisades and 1000 mm for
fascines, and minimum diameters of 20-30 mm for brush layering and palisades
and 40-50 mm for fascines.
(e) Cuttings of the following species, if specified for the truncheon cuttings planting,
shall be a minimum of 2500-3000 mm in length: chuletro (Brassaiopsishainla),
dabdabe (Garugapinnata), kavro (Ficuslacory, phaledo (Erythrina species),
ghurbis (Leucosceptrumcanum) and Gliricidiasepium.

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-25

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

(f) The Contractor shall be required to supervise all field operations very closely.
The planting of tree and shrub cuttings is a delicate business and shall be
approached in the same way as the planting of horticultural cuttings (e.g. those
of tea). The Contractor shall employ experienced agricultural or forestry
labourers for this work.
(g) Planting shall always be started at the top of the slope and under no
circumstances shall new plants be walked on or otherwise disturbed.
(h) Brush layering on road embankment slopes shall be planted as given below,
unless specified differently.
(i) Starting at the top of the area to be treated, and using appropriate measuring
equipment, exact lines should be marked out. From 1.5 meters below the
road edge, a precise contour line should be marked out on every 1 meter
down the slope.
(ii) After the line marking is completed, starting at the bottom of slope, a back
sloped terrace (1: 10) of approximately 300 mm in width x 100 mm inner
depth and 300-400 mm outer depth should be excavated along the lines.
The terrace must not be allowed to open more than 5 metres length at time
before planting work is completed.
(iii) Topsoil or agricultural soil of maximum depth of 100 mm from the ROW
should be collected and laid on the terrace. The minimum thickness shall
be 50 mm unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
(iv) Cuttings should then be placed into the terrace at 100 mm centres, the
correct way up and angled so that they are at right angles to the maximum
slope angle. All cuttings should be inserted to a depth such that two-thirds
of their length is buried.
(v) The terrace should then be partially backfilled with another 50 mm thick
layer of topsoil and another line of cuttings placed (pushing into the soil)
along the terrace at 100 mm centres, and with the individual cuttings offset
to coincide with the gaps between the cuttings in the first line. This results
in cuttings at 50 mm final gap on each brush layer (i.e. 21 cuttings per
linear metre).
(vi) When a practical working length is completed, formation of second terrace
is then started. As the excavation is undergoing, the partially backfilled
brush layering terrace below should be fully backfilled using the material
comes out of the second terrace and gently compacted. Any loose or
excess material is cleared down the slope making the complete daylight
upon the completion of whole slope.
(i) Brush layering on the landslide debris shall be planted as given below, unless
specified differently.
(i) Starting at the bottom of the area to be treated, and using appropriate

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-26

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

measuring equipment, exact lines shall be marked following a precise

contour line at 1 metre interval.
(ii) After the line marking is completed, starting at the bottom of slope, a back
sloped terrace (1: 1 0) of approximately 450 mm in width x 100 mm inner
depth and 300-400 mm outer depth shall be excavated along the lines. The
terrace shall not be allowed to open more than 5 metres length at time
before planting work is completed.
(iii) Cuttings shall then be placed into the terrace at 100 mm centres, the correct
way up and angled so that they are at right angles to the maximum slope
angle. All cuttings shall be inserted to a depth such that two-thirds of their
length is buried.
The terrace shall then be partially backfilled with 50 mm layer of soil and
another line of cuttings placed (pushing into the soil) along the terrace at
100 mm centres, and with the individual cuttings offset to coincide with
the gaps between the cuttings in the first line. This results in cuttings at 50
mm final gaps on each brush layer (i.e. 21 cuttings per linear metre).
(iv) When a practical working length is completed, formation of second terrace
t shall then be started. As the excavation is undergoing, the partially
backfilled brush layering terrace below shall be fully backfilled using that
material coming out of the second terrace and gently compacted. Any loose
or excess material shall be cleared down the slope making the complete
daylight upon the completion of whole slope.
(v) Brushlayering is often done in diagonal or chevron pattern. If it is
instructed so, the procedure given above shall be followed accept setting
out lines, which shall be changed accordingly.
(j) Palisades shall be constructed as given below, unless specified differently.
(i) Starting at the top of the area to be treated, and using appropriate measuring
equipment, exact lines shall be marked out. From 1 metre below the top of
the slope, a precise contour line shall be marked out every 1 metre down
the slope.
(ii) Starting at one end and using a small bar (usually made of mild steel and
with a pointed end), a hole shall be made that is just big enough for the first
cutting. The cutting shall be inserted and the soil shall be replaced around
it and firmed with the fingers. The cutting shall be the correct way up and
angled so that it is vertical. The cutting shall be inserted to a depth such
that two-thirds of it is buried.
(iii) This process shall be repeated along the entire line, with a series of cuttings
placed at 50 mm centres,
(iv) If a double line is specified, then a second line of cuttings shall be placed
in the same way, 100 mm behind the first and with the individual cuttings

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-27

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

offset to coincide with the gaps between the cuttings in the first line.
(v) The soil around the single or double line shall then be completely
backfilled into any remaining gaps and gently compacted. Any loose or
excess material shall be cleared down the slope before the next line is
planted.
(k) Fascines shall be bundles of hardwood cuttings laid horizontally in trenches, and
parallel to the line of the trench. The bundles shall be thereby completely buried.
Fascines shall be constructed as given below, unless specified differently.
(i) Starting at the top of the area to be treated, and using appropriate measuring
equipment, exact lines shall be marked out. From 1 metre below the top of
the slope, a precise contour line shall be marked out every 1 metre down
the slope.
(ii) Starting at the bottom as the marking is completed, trenches approximately
200 mm x 200 mm in depth shall be excavated along the lines.
(iii) 600 mm long cuttings of same material that is going to make fascine shall
be planted on the lower side of trench in vertical position as a peg at 1000
mm interval.
(iv) Cuttings shall then be laid along each trench, so that they lie horizontally
along the trench. There shall be a minimum of six cuttings together. They
shall be overlapped so that no two ends coincide. All the small branches
growing from the main branch shall be protruding on slope. Under no
circumstances, the branches and buds shall be damaged. The cuttings shall
then be tied using jute or coir (coconut fibre) string at 500 mm intervals to
form a bundle. As the fascine is created, it thereby forms a continuous
bundle right across the slope.
(v) The trench shall then be backfilled and gently compacted. The top of the
fascine shall be 50 to 100 mm below the surface. Any loose or excess
material shall be cleared down the slope before the next line is planted.
(vi) The Engineer may specify that orientations other than along the contour
of the slope are used. In this event, the Contractor shall alter the laying out
of lines accordingly and meet the precise angle required.
(vii) If the soil is dry and there is no rain within 16 to 24 hours of planting, the
site shall be watered carefully with a fine spray. The Contractor shall be
required to water for the first two weeks after planting in the event of
inadequate rainfall.
(l) Measurement and Payment: Brush layering, Palisades and Fascines shall be
measured separately as per the accepted final product in linear metre. The
payment shall be the full and final compensation to the Contractor for making
arrangements for traffic control, collecting and transporting of cuttings to the
site, all labour, tools, equipment, safety harnesses and incidentals to complete
the work as per these Specifications. If the cuttings are supplied through a

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-28

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

separate contract, costs for the supply of the same shall not be included herein.
However, if the Contractor is responsible for the supply cuttings, no separate
payment shall be made for this item.
(7) Use of Fertiliser
(a) Under certain circumstances, the use of chemical fertilisers may be specified in
place of farmyard manure or mulching.
(b) Levels of fertiliser application shall vary according to soil type and nutritional
content. However, if nutritional data are not available, the following figures shall
be used as a rough guide:
Nitrogen (N): 10 g/m2;
Phosphorus (P). 5 g/m2;
Potassium (K). 4 g/m2.
Table 28.6 below lists the chemical composition and percentage of the major plant
nutrient elements in the chemical fertilizers commonly available.
Table 28.6: Chemical Composition of Major Plant Nutrient Elements
Chemical name Chemical formula Percentage
(N) (P) (K)
Sulphate of ammonia (NH4)2SO4 21 0 0
Urea CO(NH4)2 46 0 0
Triple superphosphate CaH(PO4) 0 21 0
Muriate of potash KCL 0 0 49
Complexol Unknown 20 20 0
Diammonium phosphate (NH4)2HPO4 18 20 0

2808 JUTE NETTING WORKS

(a) The Contractor shall provide and install jute netting as shown on the Drawing or as
required by the Engineer. This shall be done according to the specifications described
hereunder, as and when required. The Contractor shall supply all necessary expertise,
resources and facilities to ensure that these requirements are met.
(b) The Engineer may instruct that jute jetting applications be used in conjunction with
other or the techniques, particularly the sowing or planting of grasses. In this event,
the netting shall be applied before the plants are introduced. When planting, the
labourers shall take care only to hold or stand on the pegs and not to disturb the netting
except when carefully placing grass seed underneath on the soil surface.
(1) Supply of Jute Netting
(a) The Contractor shall manufacture or obtain a supply of jute netting to the
Engineer's specification.
(b) The detailed specifications for standard jute netting shall be as follows.
"Standard" jute netting is used for placing on bare slopes and is normally planted
with grasses. (Note: warp ends are the length-ways threads and weft strands are
the cross-ways threads)

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-29

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

i. Material: High quality, 100% natural jute fibre from

the latest harvest, properly treated and dried
ii. Yarn: Handspun 5 to 8 mm.
iii. Strip size: minimum 1.0 x 10.0 metres;
maximum 1.1 x 11.5 metres.
iv. Warp Ends 27 ends per 1000 mm.
v. Weft trands: 20 to 24 strands per 1000 mm.

vi. Mesh size: 40 mm square mesh holes.

vii. Weight: 1.1 to 1.2 kg per square metre.

(c) The detailed specifications for wide mesh jute netting shall be as follows. "Wide
mesh" jute netting is used for holding much on to slopes which have been sown
with grass seed, (Note: warp ends are the length-ways threads and weft strands
are the cross-ways threads)

i. Material: High quality, 100% natural jute fibre from the latest harvest,
properly treated and dried.
ii. Yarn: Handspun 3 to 5 mm.
iii. Strip size: minimum 1.0 x 5.0 metres;
maximum 1.1 x 11.5 metres.
iv. Warp ends: 7 ends per 1000 mm.
v. Weft strands: 3 strands per 1000 mm.
vi. Mesh size: 150 x 450 mm rectangular mesh.
vii. Weight: 0.2 kg per square metre.
(d) Measurement and Payment: No separate measurement and payment shall be
made for the supply of jute netting. All costs incurred for the supply of jute
netting shall be included in the item rate for the placement of jute netting.
(2) Placement of Small Mesh Size Jute Netting/Standard Jute Netting
(a) The Engineer shall normally instruct the placement of standard jute netting on
slopes in excess of 45°. It is therefore very essential to place the netting in an
effective manner which fulfils the Engineer's purpose.
(b) It is assumed that the site will already have been prepared for the application of
jute netting, if it is to be prepared under a separate contract. Nevertheless, it shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the condition of the site is
good enough for the optimum effect to be attained. In any event, a smooth profile
must be obtained. All loose debris shall be removed. Concavities shall be filled
with well compacted material or dry stone dentition as shown on the Drawing or
as instructed by the Engineer. Convexities shall also be removed and it is
essential that the general profile does not have a shape giving over-steep
segments.

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-30

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

(c) Starting at one end of top of the site to be treated, a roll of netting shall be pegged
300 mm above the slope to be covered.
(d) The netting shall be rolled slowly down the slope. Hardwood cuttings, ideally of
simali (Vitexnegundo) or pegs (usually made from split bamboo culms) shall be
hammered through the netting at 1000 mm centres at 100 mm inside of each
edges. They shall protrude about 80 mm on the slope. Labourers shall stand on
these cuttings or pegs and not hang on to the netting. As the full length of the
jute netting is unrolled down the slope, a second round of the pegs shall be added
in between. This will make total allowable spacing of not more than 500 mm
interval. Another strip shall then be started to unroll from the top. This shall
overlap by 100 mm and under no circumstances the pegging is done through the
both layer of jute net instead it shall be pegged separately. Each strip of jute
netting shall be pegged down on the slope individually.
(e) The tension of the netting shall now be reduced so that it hugs the slope surface
precisely. This is done by pulling up about 200 mm at the bottom of the netting
and hooking it on to the pegs a little higher up. This process shall be repeated up
and across the slope until the netting rests snugly against the surface and is
nowhere tight or pulled away from the surface in minor concavities. Additional
pegs shall be used to hold netting closely against the face of concave slope
segments if necessary.
(f) This process shall be repeated until the entire slope surface is covered. There
shall be no lacing of any jute netting whatsoever.
(g) Finally, the bottom of the netting shall be trimmed to give a tidy finish
(h) Measurement and Payment: As the actual quantity of jute net and area covered
on slope differ from each other due to the overlapping, payment shall be made
on the basis of final area covered on slope and measured in square metre (not the
quantity of jute net). The payment shall be the full and the final compensation to
the Contractor for making arrangements for safety to traffics, purchasing of jute,
arrangement for looms and shades, fabrication of jute netting and transportation
to the site, all labour, tools, equipment, safety harnesses and incidentals to
complete the work as per these Specifications.
(3) Placement of Wide Mesh Size Jute Netting
(a) In the case of wide mesh jute netting, it shall only be specified for use on slopes
which have already been treated with grass and mulch. These shall usually be
less than 45°. However, the process of placing the netting shall be similar to that
for standard netting.
(b) Unlike the standard mesh jute net, wide mesh jute net is available on shorter
length of 5.5 metres and smaller roll in nature. It shall be opened by two people
by two end laid flat (same as bed sheet is laid) on seeded and mulched slope.
(c) The netting shall be pegged with hardwood cuttings, ideally of simali

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-31

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

(Vitexnegundo) or pegs (usually made from split bamboo culms) at every 500
mm intervals. The Contractor shall ensure that his/her labourers do not damages
the area of seeding and mulching while placing the jute net.
(d) This process shall be repeated until the entire slope surface is covered. The strips
shall then have laced together with lengths of the same jute yarn, to form a
continuous net. The lacing shall form joins every 500 mm or less.
(e) The tension of the netting shall now be reduced so that it hugs the slope precisely
and hold the mulch firmly against the surface throughout the area covered.
Additional pegs shall be used to hold netting closely against the face of concave
slope segments.
(f) Finally, the bottom of the netting shall be trimmed to give a tidy finish.
(g) Measurement and Payment: The payment shall be made on the basis of final area
covered on slope and measured in square metre (not the quantity of jute net). The
payment shall be the full and the final compensation to the Contractor for making
arrangements for safety to traffics, purchasing and transporting of jute net to the
site, all labour, tools, equipment, safety harnesses and incidentals to complete
the work as per these Specifications.
2809 GABION WIRE BOLSTERS, SUB-SOIL DRAINS AND WIRE NETTING
The contractor shall provide and install wire bolsters as shown on the Drawing or instructed
by the Engineer. This shall be done according to the specifications described hereunder, as
when required.
The Contractor shall supply all necessary expertise, resources and facilities to ensure that
these requirements are met.
(1) Fabrication of Bolster Panels
(a) Bolster panels shall be either 5 x 1 metres or 5 x 2 metres in size, according to
the type of bolster to be used. If the bolster panels are used for the wire netting,
the size of the panel shall be 5.0 m X 5.0 m. They shall be woven with hexagonal
mesh in the same way as normal gabion panels. For the panel frame, 10 swg
galvanised wire shall be used; for the mesh, 12 swg shall be adequate. Gabion
wire shall comply with the requirements of Section 2400.
(b) Weaving shall start from one of the long sides. A total of 83 coils of wire shall
be spaced evenly along the 5 metre length. This gives a mesh width of about 60
mm. Each weave shall have three twists, as for normal hexagonal mesh. This
shall give a length of about 80 mm to each mesh link. In any event, the mesh
length shall not exceed 90 mm. The mesh shall be turned on to the larger frame
wire at least one and a half turns and made fully secure.
(2) Placement of Contour Bolsters
(a) A contour bolster treatment shall give a series of stone-filled wire tubes of 300
mm diameter, laid in trenches cut across the slope. The tops of all the tubes shall
be flush with the surface of the slope in which they are placed. The purpose shall

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-32

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

be to check scour of the slope surface by preventing the development of rills and
gullies.
(b) The site to be treated shall be given final preparation immediately before bolster
installation. All small protrusions and depressions shall be obliterated by cutting,
or by infilling and compaction.
(c) Starting at the base of the area to be treated, and using appropriate measuring
equipment, exact lines shall be marked out. From 2 metres above the base of the
slope, a precise contour line shall be marked out every 2 metres up the slope.
(d) Starting at the bottom, trenches with circular base shall be dug along the lines,
adequate to take the final 300 mm diameter tubes.
(e) Bolster panels shall then be laid along the trenches and shaped to fit neatly into
the base of the trenches, as well as into any curves formed as a result of the slope
contours; each panel shall be securely joined to the next panel, to form a
continuous bolster tube.
(f) The panels shall be packed with stones, closed over and the edges wired together.
All stones must be bigger than the mesh size. The same care shall be taken as
when filling a conventional gabion basket, and stones must be carefully placed
to give good structural integrity.
(g) The ends of the bolsters shall be closed over and wired together. The trenches
around all the bolsters shall then be filled and compacted with material left from
the excavations.
(e) Once all of the lines are in place, all surplus debris shall be cleaned off the slope.
Mild steel bars of at least 16 mm diameter shall then be driven into the slope
through lower sides of the contour bolsters. These shall be at least every 2 metres
along the lines. Bars shall be 1-2 metres in length on slopes composed of soft
materials, but at the Engineer's discretion, on slopes comprising hard rocky
materials, bars of 1 metre length shall also be adequate. All bars shall be driven
home until the tops protrude no more than 25 mm above the slope surface.
(f) Measurement and Payment: Bolster shall be measured as per the accepted final
product in linear metre. The payment shall be the full and the final compensation
to the Contractor for making arrangements for traffic control, fabrication of
bolster panel including cost of wire, collection and transportation of
boulder/stone to the site, packing of stones/boulders, wiring, supply and driving
of steel bars, excavation and filling, all labour, tools, equipment, safety harnesses
and incidentals to complete the work as specified in these Specifications.
(3) Placement of Herringbone Bolsters
(a) A herringbone bolster network is in essence a system of wire tubes of between
300 mm to 600 mm in diameter depending on the amount of water flowing
through the site, laid in trenches cut into the slope. The main bolster shall run
straight down the slope (the spine) with other running into it at an angle of 45°

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-33

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

to the fall of the slope (the herringbones or branches) depending on slope angle
and terrain morphology. The purpose shall be to check scour of the slope surface
by preventing the development of rills and gullies, and to drain the surface
material in a similar way to a French drain. The diagonal components shall be at
2 to 5 metre centres if measured straight down the slope.
(b) The site to be treated shall be given final preparation immediately before bolster
installation. All small protrusions and depressions shall be obliterated by cutting,
or by infilling and compaction.
(c) Starting at the base of the area to be treated, and using appropriate measuring
equipment, exact lines shall be marked out: every 7.0 metres across the slope, a
line shall run straight up to the top of the slope (these form the main bolster
spines). From the base of the line, and every 3 metres above this, other lines of
5 metres length shall be marked at 45° to the main line (these will form the
herringbones).
(d) Starting at the bottom, trenches with circular base shall be dug along the lines,
adequate to take the final 300 mm diameter tubes, or 600 mm diameter tubes if
large (5 x 2 metre) panels are specified.
(e) Bolster panels shall then be laid along the trenches and shaped to fit neatly into
the base of the trenches, as well as into any curves formed as a result of the slope
contours; the panels of the herringbones shall be securely joined to the panels of
the main bolster.
(f) The panels shall be gradually closed together and secured, working up from the
bottom of the slope, while stones are passed in from above to fill them. The
stones shall be randomly packed so as to allow free drainage, and all stones shall
be bigger than 100 mm. The same care shall be taken when filling a conventional
gabion basket, and stones shall be carefully placed to give good structural
integrity.
(g) The upper ends of the herringbones shall be closed over and wired together; they
should touch the ends of the next herringbones but shall not be secured (hooked)
to each other. The trenches around all the bolsters shall then be filled and
compacted with material left from the excavations.
(h) Once all of the lines are in place, all surplus debris shall be cleaned off the slope.
Mild steel bars of at least 16 mm diameter shall then be driven into the slope
through the sides of the main spine bolsters and the lower sides of the
herringbone bolsters. These shall be at least every 2 metres along the lines. Bars
shall be 1-2 metres in length on slopes composed of soft materials, but at the
Engineer's discretion, on slopes comprising hard rocky materials, bars of 1 metre
length may be adequate. All bars shall be driven home until the tops protrude no
more than 25 mm above the slope surface.
(i) Measurement and Payment: Bolster that are accepted by the Engineer shall be
measured in linear metre. The payment shall be the full and the final

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-34

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

compensation to the Contractor for making arrangements for traffic control,

fabrication of bolster panel including cost of wires, collection and transportation
of boulder/stone to the site, excavations and fillings, boulder/stone packing, all
wiring, supply and driving of steel bars, all labour, tools, equipment, safety
harnesses and incidentals to complete the work as specified in these
Specifications.
(4) Wire Netting
(a) Wire netting shall be a complete cover on the steep rocky slope where heavily
shattered rock face is eroding away by surface water. The site shall be prepared
as outlined in Clause 2806. A wire mesh panel, normally larger than bolster, of
5 m x 5m shall be placed over the slope and later plant will be grown to replace
the wire netting.
(b) The site to be treated shall be given final preparation immediately before wire
netting. All loose bulging shall be trimmed off.
(c) Starting at the top of the slope to be treated, wire netting shall be placed securing
well on to the slope. The wire net shall then be stapled down with an "U" shaped
hook.
(d) The hook shall be made of 16 mm diameter M/S rod and a minimum of 1000
mm in length. The hook shall be driven hammering down with the mason's
hammer at 500 mm interval. This will be effective if driven into the cracked
joint. A shorter length may also be used if the rocky face does not permit the bar,
but the Engineer's approved and instruction shall be obtained prior to taking a
decision.
(e) The wire netting shall be well secured. If there are any minor concavity and
convexity, the wire shall be secured by hammering down by mason's hammer.
Additional staples could be used as necessary. If some of the staples become
weak and loose, they shall be jammed with 1:4 cement sand mortar in slurry
form.
(f) Measurement and Payment: Wire netting shall be measured in square metre. The
her; they payment shall be the full and the final compensation to the Contractor
for making arrangements for traffic control, purchasing of wire net, fabrication
and transportation of wire netting to the site, supply and driving of hooks, all
labour, tools, equipment, materials, safety harnesses and incidentals to complete
the work as specified in these Specifications.

2811 SITE AFTERCARE AND MAINTENANCE

(1) The Contractor shall maintain planted bio-engineering sites as required by the
Engineer. This shall be done according to the specifications described hereunder, as
and when required. The Contractor shall supply all necessary expertise and resources
to ensure that these requirements are met.
(2) The Contractor shall carry out weeding as required throughout the site. All annual
SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-35
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

weeds and other unwanted plants shall be cut just above the ground and the aerial parts
will be used to make compost or mulch. Weeds shall not be pulled out by the roots
since this disturbs the ground surface.
(3) Weeding shall be carried out throughout the growing season. It shall be undertaken
with particular diligence at the end of the monsoon, so that there is the minimum
amount of competition during the subsequent dry season.
(4) The Contractor shall carry out mulching as required throughout the site. All plants
required under the bio-engineering specifications will be mulched using material
prepared as specified in Sub-clause 2805 (5), or the aerial parts of weeds cut on the
site or brought from elsewhere for the purpose. The desired plants shall be kept
mulched at all times but especial care shall be taken in the spring, when the soil
moisture deficit is at its greatest.
(5) The Contractor shall replace failed, damaged, diseased and very weak plants, using
fresh, healthy plants of the same species, at the correct time of year for planting. This
replanting operation shall normally be carried out during the monsoon in the year
following the first planting works. Vegetation structures shall be enriched by the
planting of additional cuttings or seedlings, as instructed by the Engineer. Failed
seeding areas shall be reseeded at the appropriate time of year.
(6) In replanting and enrichment works, the Engineer may specify the use of different
species. This shall be done where failures or poor performance of plants may be
attributed to poor stock or an incorrect initial choice of species.
(7) All bio-engineering sites shall be maintained so that there are at least the following two
storeys of vegetation. In certain locations, however, there may be a number of
additional vegetation storeys.
(a) A dense ground cover of healthy grass plants, in the configuration specified at
the time of planting.
(b) An open canopy of shrubs or trees with a deeper rooting network.
(8) In general, it shall be necessary to keep the upper canopy thinned in order to maintain
the lower ground cover. Most grasses require high light intensities and become
degraded if subjected to excessive shade from the overstorey. It shall therefore be the
Contractor's responsibility to thin the canopy as necessary to permit adequate levels
of light to penetrate for the optimum growth of the grass understory.

SECTION 2800 BIO ENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-36

 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS

(9) All products from thinning and pruning operations shall be disposed off in
accordance with the regulation of His Majesty's Government. The Contractor shall
follow the instructions of the Engineer in this regard.
(10) Other maintenance operations shall to be undertaken by the Contractor
according to the instructions of the Engineer.
(11) Measurement and Payment: The works shall be measured in a lump sum basis.
The item rate shown in the Bill of Quantities shall be the full and the final
compensation to the Contractor for carrying out all works specified herein including
provision of site protection specified in Clause 2810.
Should at any time the Engineer give any instruction for the proper Site
Protection/Aftercare and Maintenance and the Contractor does not respond within
24 hours, the Engineer shall be empowered to instruct others to carry out the works.
Any costs involved by such actions shall be borne by the Contractor.

SECTION 2800 BIOENGINEERING WORKS Page 28-37